JP5355753B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve the interest of a player in notice performance when revariation display is executed. <P>SOLUTION: This game machine determines to execute the notice performance using one of a display type notice pattern YAP2-1 to a display type notice pattern YAP2-10 that are included in an notice pattern type corresponding to a "button operation notice", in a first notice execution period (first variation) until the firstr false continuous variation (revariation) is executed in a variable display performance of "false continuous notice", and in a second notice execution period (after the first to third revariation) after starting the false continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display performance of the "false continuous notice", in a period where decoration symbols are variably displayed in a whole decoration symbol display area. The notice performance to be executed after starting the false continuous variation (revariation) is the same as the notice performance to be executed in the first variation, has a higher reliability, and needs the multiple number of operations with respect to an operation button. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2012,JPO&amp;INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable based on the start condition being satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. And a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player after the variable information display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when the game medium wins in the winning area (start condition is satisfied) is provided, and the variable display device displays a variable display of the identification information. Some are configured to be able to be controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result is a specific display result (big hit symbol). There is also provided a gaming machine that enters a special gaming state in which probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed in which the probability of becoming a “hit” after the end of a specific gaming state is improved.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, when the number of times that the identification information is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed when viewed from the player is increased, the probability of being a “big hit” increases, so that a specific gaming state is achieved. There is one that makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for winning (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-21094 A

  However, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, the player's attention is directed only to the number of re-variations, and the interest in the effect operation such as the notice effect is likely to be diminished. There was a risk that the effect of the performance would be reduced and the game entertainment would decline.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game by attracting the player's interest not only in the number of re-variable display but also in the notice effect. The purpose is to do.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the claims of the present application determines the start condition (for example, following the determination of Yes in step S205 and the determination of Yes in step S208, or determining Yes in step S202). After the determination in step S211 and Yes in step S211, a plurality of types that can be identified based on the fact that the determination in step S215 is No and then the determination in step S241 is No is established. A plurality of variable display portions (for example, “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc. in the image display device 5). ) Including variable display means (for example, the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the image display device 5), and the variable display When a combination of specific identification information is derived and displayed at, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, Operating means (for example, the operation button 30) that can be operated in accordance with the above and prior determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that determines whether or not to control the specific gaming state before the identification information is derived and displayed. The CPU 103 executes the process of step S250) and the variable information is displayed after the variable information is started to be displayed in response to the start condition being satisfied once. After temporarily stopping the combination of identification information of non-specific display on all the display parts, the variable display of the identification information is again performed on all of the plurality of variable display parts. Re-variable display execution means for executing re-variable display (for example, pseudo-continuous variation in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”) once or a plurality of times (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the decorative symbol variation processing in step S162). Based on the result of determination by the prior determination means), the re-variable display is executed during the variable display of the identification information when the start condition is satisfied Re-variable display determining means for determining whether or not to perform (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern type in step S271 and the part in which the variation pattern is determined in step S274), and the determination result by the prior determination unit Based on the notice effect type (for example, display system notice CAY1 to display system notice C) for executing the notice effect during the variable display of the identification information. A notice effect type determining means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S733) for determining one of a plurality of types classified based on the effect mode, etc. The notice effect determining means for determining the notice effect to be executed during the variable display of the identification information from among the notice effects included in the notice effect type determined by the notice effect type determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the notice effect determined during the variable display of the identification information in step S515. The unit that executes the decorative symbol variation process of step S162 using the performed notice effect control pattern As a notice effect type that can be determined by the notice effect type determining means, for example, a notice effect at the time of operation for notifying the possibility of entering the specific gaming state in accordance with an operation on the operation means by the player (for example, FIG. 35. Operational advance notice effect types (for example, display system notice pattern type of display system notice CAY2, etc.) including a plurality of display system notice patterns YAP2-1 to display system notice pattern YAP2-10 as shown in FIG. ), And the notice effect execution means variably displays the identification information in all of the plurality of variable display sections in the variable display for which the revariable display determination means has decided to execute the revariable display. The first notice execution period (for example, at the time of the first change) from the start of the variable display to the temporary stop, and the re-variable display The notice effect can be executed in a plurality of notice execution periods including the second notice execution period after the beginning (for example, after the first to third re-variation) (for example, display system notice pattern determination table 171B to 171B). 171D, first-time variation and first-third time, depending on the combination of display-system notice pattern determined using any of display-system notice pattern determination tables 172B to 172D and display-system notice pattern determination tables 173B to 173D The notice effect that is determined after the change is performed), and the notice effect determining means determines that the revariable display is executed by the revariable display determining means, and the notice effect during operation is determined by the notice effect type determining means. When the type is determined, the notice performance included in the operation notice notice effect type in the first notice execution period and the second notice execution period. The notice effect is determined from the output (for example, by using the display system notice pattern determination tables 172B to 172D shown in FIGS. 34 (B), 35 (A) and (B), the first change or the first re-change. The game machine further determines when the operation-time notice effect is executed, by determining one of the display-type notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display-type notice pattern YAP2-10. The display device includes an operation promotion display unit that displays an operation promotion image that prompts an operation on the operation unit.
According to such a configuration, re-variable display is performed from the start of variable display of the identification information until the variable display result is derived and displayed, and the operation-time notice effect included in the operation-time notice effect type is executed. Of the plurality of variable display parts, the first notice execution period from the start of variable display to the temporary stop, and the variable display of the variable display. In the second notice execution period after the start, the notice effect is determined from the notice effects included in the operation notice effect type. Thus, during variable display of identification information for which re-variable display is performed, an advance notice effect at the time of operation is executed in accordance with the player's operation with respect to the operation means. However, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by attracting the player's interest. In addition, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by suppressing the deterioration of the effect due to the fact that the advance notice effect at the time of operation is not executed with the progress of the re-variable display and the distrust of the player.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, each notice effect type determined by the notice effect type determining means includes a first notice effect (for example, a display system included in the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1). For example, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 included in the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2, the display system notice pattern YAP3-1 included in the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY3) The second notice effect for notifying that the specific gaming state is more likely than the first notice effect (for example, display type notice pattern YAP1-2 included in the display type notice pattern type of display type notice CAY1). Display system preview patterns YAP2-2 included in the display system preview pattern type of display system preview pattern YAP1-4 and display system preview CAY2 Display system notice pattern YAP2-10, display system notice pattern YAP3-2 included in display system notice pattern type of display system notice CAY3, and display system notice pattern YAP3-9). When the re-variable display determining means determines that the re-variable display is to be executed, and when the determination to execute the second warning effect is performed in the first warning execution period, The first notice effect is determined not to be executed (for example, display system notice pattern determination tables 171B to 171D shown in FIGS. 32B, 33A, and 33B, or FIG. 34B). Display system notice pattern determination tables 172B to 172D shown in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B), or FIGS. 36 (B), 37 (A) and 37 (B). Using 示系 notice pattern determination table 173B～173D, determines the display system notice pattern corresponding to such later time or first re-change the first variation) may be configured to.
In such a configuration, the second notice effect is included in each notice effect type for notifying that there is a high possibility of entering the specific gaming state compared to the first notice effect, and the second notice effect is provided during the first notice execution period. Is executed, the determination that the first notice effect is not executed in the second notice execution period is made. As a result, the expectation of becoming a specific gaming state with the progress of re-variable display is enhanced, while preventing the possibility of becoming a specific gaming state foretold by the notice effect from decreasing, This can suppress the decline of the game and the distrust of the player, and can improve the interest of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the operation time notice effect type determined by the notice effect type determining means includes a first operation time notice effect (for example, display system notice pattern YAP2-1). ~ Announcement effect by any one of the display system notice patterns YAP2-4) and a second operation notice effect (for example, display system notice pattern YAP2) in which the number of operations for the operation means is larger than the first operation notice effect. -5 to a notice effect by any one of the display system notice patterns YAP2-10), and the notice effect determining means is determined to execute the revariable display by the revariable display determining means, In addition, when the operation announcement type is determined by the announcement production type determination means, the first operation announcement is performed during the first announcement execution period. At the same time, during the second notice execution period, it is determined to execute the notice notice during the second operation (for example, the display system notice pattern determination table 172B to 172B shown in FIGS. 34B, 35A, and 35B). 172D is used to determine the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 corresponding to the first change, and the display system notice pattern YAP2-5 to the display system notice pattern YAP2 corresponding to after the first re-change to the third re-change. May be determined to be any of −10).
In such a configuration, the second operation-time notice effect is included in the operation-time notice effect type, and the number of operations on the operation means is larger than that of the first operation-time notice effect, and during the first operation during the first notice execution period. When executing the notice effect, a determination is made to execute the notice effect during the second operation during the second notice execution period. In this way, the expectation of becoming a specific gaming state as the re-variable display progresses is enhanced, and the interest of the player is increased by increasing the number of times of operation of the operating means in the operation announcement effect. Can be improved.

(4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the identification information is variably displayed on the basis of the fact that the pre-determining means has decided not to control the specific gaming state. Reach determination means for determining whether or not the state is set to a predetermined reach state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S263 to S267), and a determination result by the prior determination means and the reach determination means Thus, the variable display pattern type determining means (for example, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes of steps S262, S268, and S269) that determines the variable display pattern type (for example, the variation pattern type) of the identification information to be one of a plurality of types. And the variable display pattern type determining means for executing the processing of steps S270 and S271). Variable display pattern determination means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the processing of steps S272 to S274) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern) of the identification information from among the variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined in the above. A portion to be executed, etc.).
In such a configuration, the variable display pattern type of the identification information is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the determination results by the prior determination unit and the reach determination unit, and the variable display included in the determined variable display pattern type A variable display pattern of identification information is determined from the patterns. This makes it easy to change the variable display pattern type and variable display pattern, and to set random number assignment when adding, and relax the restrictions when setting the appearance rate of effects corresponding to the variable display pattern at the development stage. it can.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), as the variable display pattern type that can be determined by the variable display pattern type determination means, a plurality of types of variable display effects including the re-variable display (for example, “pseudo train” and “ Specific including variable display patterns (for example, fluctuation pattern PA1-4 and fluctuation pattern PA1-5 shown in FIG. 6) that execute part or all of “slip after chance stop” and “slip” variable display effects) A variable display pattern type (for example, a variable pattern type CA1-4) is provided, and the variable display pattern determination unit determines the variable display pattern type when the reach determination unit determines that the reach state is not set. The variable display pattern of the identification information is changed to the variable display function based on the determination of the specific variable display pattern type by the means. (For example, by using the loss variation pattern determination table 137 shown in FIG. 17, any one of the variation pattern PA1-4 and the variation pattern PA1-5 included in the variation pattern type CA1-4). May be configured to be determined).
In such a configuration, a variable display pattern for executing part or all of a plurality of types of variable display effects including re-variable display is included in the specific variable display pattern type, and it is determined that the reach state is not set. Sometimes, the variable display pattern for executing the variable display effect is determined based on the specific variable display pattern type. Thereby, even when the variable display state of the identification information is not the reach state, the variable display effect including the re-variable display can be executed, and various effects can be performed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(6) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), the re-variable display executing means temporarily stops the identification information in all or a part of the plurality of variable display sections, By changing the identification information in all or part of the temporarily stopped variable display section, the identification information of a predetermined special combination is temporarily stopped, and then the specific effect (for example, FIG. 26 (B) can be executed (eg, a variable display effect of “slip” by the slip patterns of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 shown in FIG. 26B) (for example, the change pattern PA3-4 and the change pattern PA3-5 shown in FIG. 6). , Variation pattern PA3-9, variation pattern PA3-10, variation pattern PA3-12 to variation pattern PA3-14, variation pattern PA5-4, variation pattern PA5-5, variation pattern shown in FIG. PA6-4, fluctuation pattern PA6-5, fluctuation pattern PA6-7 to fluctuation pattern PA6-9, fluctuation pattern PA8-4, fluctuation pattern PA8-5, fluctuation pattern PA9-4, fluctuation pattern PA9-5, fluctuation pattern PA9- 7 to “variable display effect of“ pseudo-continuous ”by the variation pattern PA9-9”), the revariable display determination means has different ratios (for example, a hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16) according to the number of executions of the revariable display. In the setting example of 136, in the case of the variation pattern type CA3-3, a ratio of 0 at the first variation, a ratio of about 3/10 after the first re-variation, a ratio of about 4/5 after the second re-variation, That is, the ratio is about 4/5 after at least one of the first re-variation and the second re-variation. Occasionally, the rate is 0, after the first re-variation, about 2/5, after the second re-variation, about 7/10, after the third re-variation, about 9/10, that is, from the first Including a specific effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect at least after the third re-variation (for example, the CPU 103 sets the change pattern in step S274). And the like.
In such a configuration, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific effect at a different rate depending on the number of executions of the re-variable display. In this way, depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed, the player's expectation or frustration about whether or not the re-variable display is continuously executed is given, and not only for the number of re-variable display but also for the specific effect. However, the game interest can be improved by attracting the player's interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a loss variation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a big hit fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a non-reach fluctuation | variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot promotion promotion determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a slip pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the temporary stop symbol determination table at the time of a slide. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eye determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation variation. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the temporary stop symbol determination table before a re-lottery. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a display type notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display type | formula notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a display type | formula notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display type | formula notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a display type | formula notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display type | formula notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a display type | formula notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a member type | system | group notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a member system notification pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of various effect control pattern tables. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of determination operation | movement of a temporary stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the notice effect by a display type | formula notice pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the notice effect by a display type | formula notice pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the notice effect by a display type | formula notice pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the case of performing the variable display effect of "pseudo-continuous" and "slip". It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the case of performing the variable display effect of "the slip after a chance eye stop."

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping the variable display by displaying the identification information such as decorative symbols in a stopped manner (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display).

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the variable display of the first special figure is executed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, so that the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, when the hold memory display is performed, the special figure hold memory number based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition or the second start condition. If it cannot be specified, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number may be changed to a predetermined display form, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  A noticeable movable member 78 is provided on the upper side of the decorative portion around the image display device 5. The noticeable movable member 78 is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 86 shown in FIG. 2 and moves as the motor 86 rotates. The notice movable member 78 operates when a notice effect is executed. As an example, the noticeable movable member 78 is held at the upper part of the image display device 5 at the normal time (when the operation is stopped) and at a position retracted from the front surface of the display screen in the image display device 5. Then, at the time of the operation due to the notice effect, the image display device 5 is rotated so that at least a part of the noticeable movable member 78 advances to the front surface of the display screen, and returns to the normal position again at the end of the operation.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening. Normally open. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state. Easy to open and open. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If so, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started first is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Due to this, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). In this embodiment, the added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, the symbols indicating “−”, and the like as normal symbols. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate. The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. The operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. Operation may be possible. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation button 30 only needs to be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation button 30 is detected by the operation detection switch 31 shown in FIG.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by the above, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the last special figure game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, “big hit” is obtained as a specific display result, and if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “lost” is displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and the symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a different special symbol from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed which changes to the first state which is advantageous to the person. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15 round big hit state, 15 balls are obtained each time a game ball wins a big winning opening. The 15 round round big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round becomes a second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 15 round big hit state. Note that in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round, the predetermined winning port serving as the big winning port is changed from the closed state to the open state. Thus, the second state that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state may be restored after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed. In such a two-round big win state, if a game ball wins a big winning opening, 15 balls will be obtained, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.5 seconds) Short. Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a game is not substantially obtained. The 2 round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. In addition, the big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round execution times compared to the big hit gaming state as the multiple round specific gaming state. For example, the round execution number is small round specific gaming state. While the state and the multi-round specific gaming state are the same, in the small-round specific gaming state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big prize opening is the upper limit period for the multi-round specific gaming state (for example, 29 seconds) ) May be shorter. That is, the big hit gaming state as the small round specific gaming state is that the period in which the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each round is a second period shorter than the first period in the multi-round specific gaming state, The number of executions may be at least one of the second round numbers less than the first round number in the multi-round specific gaming state.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the big hit symbols of 15 rounds, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, the special symbol variation time (special diagram variation time) in the special figure game is controlled to be a short time state as compared with the normal state. Here, the normal state is a normal game state as a game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a probability change state, and a short time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). As in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is usually a big bonus It is called a symbol (also called “non-probable big hit symbol”). Further, the fact that the 15-round non-probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “15R normal big hit” (also referred to as “15R non-probable big hit”).

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the big hit symbol of 15 rounds, the special symbol that shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. After the status is over, or after the 2 round jackpot state has ended based on the special symbol showing the number “1” that will be the 2 round jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game, As one of the special game states different from the normal game state, for example, the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed is controlled. The In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative design is improved so that the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result is a “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. Further, the fact that the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is called “15R probability big hit”. The fact that the sudden hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “surprise big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability variable big hit”). The 15 round jackpot symbols “3” and “7” and the 2 round jackpot symbol “1” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. .

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “pseudo ream”, “slip”, and “slip after chance stop” can be executed, and the variation pattern is determined on the main board 11 side. It is determined whether or not to perform each effect operation.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a special combination pseudo as shown in FIG. 3A is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as the consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 3A or the like is a decorative symbol displayed temporarily in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is a “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation change display or immediately changing the decorative symbol again only by stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Thereby, the player can recognize that the specific effect of the “pseudo-ream” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-ream chances GC1 to GC8, and as the number of times of the pseudo-ream fluctuation increases. In addition, the expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change (pseudo-continuous change). Also good. As an example, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, one that is lit among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area is 1 It may be controlled to increase one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled. As another example, the movable member provided inside or outside the game area may be controlled to operate during each fluctuation display (including the first fluctuation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. . This movable member may be the same movable member as the notice movable member 78, or may be a movable member provided separately from the notice movable member 78. As yet another example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image during the period of each change display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. May be. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, among the lighting and blinking of the decorative LED, the operation of the movable member, the display of the effect image, Control may be performed so as to execute a re-variation effect combining a part or all of them. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. When the production mode changes in, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” or the “15R probability variable big hit” may be increased.

  The production operation executed as the re-variation production may include any production operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9. Further, for example, a difference in output of sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, a difference in motion of a production target object (for example, a movable member such as the movable member 78 for notice), a difference in operating speed, a difference in operating distance, and an operating direction Etc.), the movement of the character image displayed on the image display device 5 (difference in operation speed, difference in operating distance, difference in operation direction, etc.) The display device 5 may change the presentation mode in the revariation effect by changing the character display instead of the character image or changing the display of the background image. Further, in addition to the re-variation effect executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped, for example, audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped and displayed by an arbitrary production operation such as the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9.

  In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and after changing the decorative symbol again, stop display. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols different from the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. After the temporary stop display, a re-variation in the “slip” variable display effect is executed, and all or a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. A specific effect of executing a pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that becomes one of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 by changing the decorative symbol May be performed. It is to be noted that the pseudo-continuous chance is provided in a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). After the decorative symbols are variably displayed in a manner that cannot be any of the eyes GC1 to GC8, all or part of the temporarily displayed decorative symbol display area (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” ”In the decorative symbol display area 5 </ b> R, or both), the temporary decorative display is performed after the decorative symbol is changed again, so that the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed can be changed to a mode that can become the pseudo-continuous stitches GC <b> 1 to GC <b> 8. You may do it. As described above, in the specific effect, the “slid” variable display effect is followed by the pseudo continuous change (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect, so that “left”, “middle”, “ The decorative symbol display of the temporary combination that is different from the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed in all or a part of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By changing the decorative design in all or a part of the area, the decorative design that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then re-variation that becomes pseudo continuous variation is performed.

  Further, for example, a display mode (non-reach state) in which the variable display state of the decorative symbols does not reach the reach state by temporarily stopping display of different decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. ), After the temporary stop display, the change in the “slip” variable display effect is executed to change all or part of the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. As a result, the same decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R to reach a reach state. In this embodiment, when the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is two or three times, the pseudo-continuous display effect is executed after the variable display effect of “slip” is executed. There is a case in which a decorative pattern that becomes one of the chance eyes GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped or displayed.

  As a specific effect, when a pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is executed in a variable display effect of “pseudo” following a variable display effect of “sliding”, the number of times the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is executed Accordingly, variable display effects of “sliding” are executed at different ratios. Specifically, it may be set so that the possibility that the “slip” variable display effect is performed increases as the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) increases. As an example, during the first fluctuation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols until the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is executed, the “slip” variable display effect is not executed and the pseudo continuous chance GC1. A decorative symbol that is any one of -GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. On the other hand, after the first re-variation, for example, a decorative display that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is displayed temporarily after a variable display effect of “slip” is performed at a rate of about 2/5. Then, the decorative pattern which becomes one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed without executing the “slip” variable display effect at a ratio of about 3/5. In addition, after the second re-variation, for example, after the variable display effect of “sliding” is performed at a rate of about 7/10, the decorative symbol that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. The decorative display which becomes any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed without executing the “slip” variable display effect at a ratio of 3/10. Furthermore, after the third re-variation, for example, the “slip” variable display effect is performed at a rate of about 9/10, and then the reach state is reached, and the “slip” variable display effect is executed at a rate of about 1/10. It will be in a reach state without being. Even after the first re-variation or after the second re-variation, after reaching the “slip” variable display effect or without executing the “slip” variable display effect It may become. In addition, the rate at which the “sliding” variable display effect is executed corresponding to the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) depends on whether the variable display result is “big hit”, the type of reach effect, It may be made different depending on the total number of continuous fluctuations (revariations). Furthermore, the rate at which the “slip” variable display effect is executed is not limited to one that is set to be different for every number of executions of pseudo-continuous change (re-change), and is a plurality of different rates. If present, the same ratio may be included in a part.

  In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped temporarily for the decorative combination (special combination) that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. After the display, unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the effect display that changes the decorative symbol to be stopped by changing the decorative symbol again in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is done.

  In addition to “pseudo train”, “slip”, and “slip after chance stop”, for example, “Development opportunity” and “Development chance end” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. , The player's expectation is enhanced. Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach and variable display effects, for example, an effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative design, such as displaying an effect image such as a predetermined character image or message image. Due to the above, a notice effect for notifying the player that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” is executed. There is. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As long as it is executed (started) before the state reaches the reach state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “step-up action” and “button operation notice” are set to be executable. An effect operation that becomes a notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, by the effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. An effect operation may be performed in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched. Further, in the notice effect of “step-up operation”, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, the effect mode is changed in a plurality of stages by the effect operation of moving the noticeable movable member 78 in a plurality of types of operation modes in a predetermined order. There is a case where an effect operation such as (step-up) is performed. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after the noticeable movable member 78 performs the effect operation in one type of operation, the effect operation in the notice effect is terminated without switching to the effect operation of the second stage. You may be allowed to make it. As described above, the notice effect of the “step-up operation” is executed in response to one start prize (that one game ball has entered the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening). This is a kind of notice effect that is executed during variable display of symbols and decorative designs, and is a step-up notice effect that changes the notice style (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) in multiple stages (steps up). . In general, the greater the number of changes (number of steps), the higher the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”). Also, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode at each step, it becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a specific reach effect is executed, “15R normal big hit ”To“ 15R probable big hit ”, at least one of them may be notified in advance. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In the notice effect of “button operation notice”, for example, the display of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5 is changed in response to the operation button 30 being operated by the player during the variable display of the decorative design. Or, changing the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the production operation is changed. As an example, in the notice effect of “button operation notice”, a predetermined effect operation that becomes a button operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of decorative symbols. The button operation promotion effect is an effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 by, for example, displaying an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5. If it is. The effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is not limited to an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display an effect image. The effect that causes a predetermined sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED that lights or blinks in a predetermined lighting pattern, one that operates a movable member provided in a rendering accessory provided inside or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, or a combination of these It may be. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is set. When the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected by the operation detection switch 31 within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, and prepared in advance, for example. One of the plurality of types of effect images is displayed on the image display device 5, and the sound effect corresponding to one of the plurality of types of sound patterns prepared in advance is displayed on the speaker 8L. Various effects such as output from 8R are executed.

  When the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the execution is performed. An effect operation serving as a notice effect can be executed at the time of the first change or during variable display after the first to third re-changes. As an example, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the decorative display variable display is performed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A plurality of notice execution periods are provided as the periods being executed. In such a plurality of notice execution periods, the first notice execution period at the time of the first change from the start of the variable display until the decorative symbol that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is displayed temporarily, And a second notice execution period after the start of pseudo-continuous change (re-change) in the variable display effect (after the first to third re-change). The first notice execution period is not limited to the time of the first change, for example, when the first notice change period is the first notice execution period and the second notice change period is the second notice execution period. As described above, even after the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is started, the decorative display of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is variable. Of the plurality of periods being executed, the period that starts first may be the first notice execution period, and the period that starts after the end of the first notice execution period may be the second notice execution period.

  In this embodiment, in each of the plurality of notice execution periods, a notice effect with the same effect content or a notice effect with different effect contents is set to be executable. Here, when a notice effect of “button operation notice” is executed during the first notice execution period, each notice execution is performed so that the notice effect of “button operation notice” is executed even during the second notice execution period. The notice effect for the period is determined. In addition, for example, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state, the decorative symbol is stopped in a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the period of display (temporary stop display), even when the notice effect of “button operation notice” is executed in the first notice execution period, a notice effect that is different from “button operation notice” (for example, “step-up operation”). ”) May be executed. In addition, if the “button operation advance notice” notice effect is executed in the first notice execution period and the second notice execution period, it overlaps with this notice effect or before and after this notice effect is executed. A notice effect different from “button operation notice” may be executed at one or both timings.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative pattern of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as the 15 round big hit symbol, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the fixed decorative symbol that is usually a big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose design numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal big hit symbol, the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed after a predetermined reach effect is executed, etc. The mode is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state or the normal state. become.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the situation, a reach effect similar to the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed, or a reach effect different from the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed. For example, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the definite decorative combination of the probable big hit combination is stopped is displayed. This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as a big hit type) when the variable display result is “big hit”. In addition, when the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decoration symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration symbol. . In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, if the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it is included in the variable display mode of “probable change”. Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during variable display of a decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probable variation jackpot combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are displayed temporarily on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “left ”,“ Medium ”,“ Right ”decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R with the same decorative symbols in the same state, and then fluctuate again. One of the decorative symbols (normal symbols) to be combined is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “normal”, as the re-lottery effect, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a normal jackpot combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is displayed. A change promotion promotion effect that is derived and displayed is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern The changing promotion success effect during the stop display of the symbol may be executed, or the changing promotion failure effect during the change may be executed.

  After the decisive decorative symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the round in the jackpot gaming state, one round ends in the jackpot gaming state and the next round starts During the jackpot game state, during the jackpot game state, during the period from the end of the final round until the start of the next variable display game, etc. An effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the last round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  The jackpot promotion effect includes a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the game state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol is variably displayed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a certain change state by displaying different effect images.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, for example, FIG. Any one of a combination of a plurality of types of determined decorative symbols predetermined as the chances of success TC1 to TC4 as shown in (B) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number of “1” that is the big hit symbol for 2 rounds is stopped and displayed as a special symbol for the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, for example, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, various decorative decorative variable display modes in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “sudden probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state. Note that the fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination, the fixed decorative symbol that is a probable variation jackpot combination, and the fixed decorative symbol that is the odd chance item TC1 to TC4 are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative symbol of a jackpot combination (specific combination). .

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accuracy”, the accuracy mode start effect may be executed during variable display of the decorative symbols. In the surprise mode start effect, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to the big hit type being “Accuracy”. After the surprise mode start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode called the accuracy mode may be started. In addition, the random mode start effect is not limited to the effect operation that is executed during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and continues from the variable display even during part or all of the period of the two round big hit state. An effect operation may be performed. When the suddenness mode start effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be erased, and after the suddenness mode start effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. In the sudden accuracy mode, for example, until the variable display result is “big hit” and the probability variation state ends, the effect in the sudden accuracy mode is performed. In the effect in the suddenness mode, the display mode of the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5 is different from the display mode in the normal performance mode, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R along with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The sound to be different from the sound in the normal effect mode, the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED to be different from the lighting pattern in the normal effect mode, or a part of these Alternatively, by combining all of them, it may be informed so that the player can recognize that the mode is inaccuracy.

  In the probability variation state, for example, an effect image for informing that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and / or a background image or a decorative pattern on the display screen of the image display device 5. The display mode may be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, so that the player may be in the effect mode during probability change in which the player can recognize that the probability change state.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second change start commands and the change pattern designation command are prepared as separate effect control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the result of prior determination as to whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. In this case, different EXT data is set in accordance with the big hit type determination result indicating whether the decorative symbol variable display mode (big hit type) is “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” and the big hit type determination result.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect control command for setting EXT data corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (one of “losing” and “big hit” and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”) is prepared. Then, information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates execution of an effect operation corresponding to the start of the big hit gaming state, such as displaying an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the preliminary determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 12, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed corresponding to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 11. You can make it.

  When the command A1XXH is in the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening is informed that it is a predetermined period of the big winning gaming state (the period during which the big winning opening is open), such as a period in which the big winning opening is open. This is a notification command. The command A2XXH is a predetermined period of the big hit gaming state different from the big prize opening opening notification command, such as a period in which the big prize opening changed from the open state to the closed state when in the big hit gaming state (the big winning opening closing period) This is a notification command after opening the big prize opening to notify that it is. With the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening or the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, the number of rounds executed in the 15 round big hit state (for example, “1” to “15”) or the number of opened big winning openings in the two round big hit state Corresponding to (for example, “1” or “2”), different EXT data is set. Note that in the big hit gaming state, it ends from the start of the big hit gaming state regardless of whether it is a period in which the big winning opening is in an open state or a period in which the big winning opening is changed from an open state to a closed state. You may make it perform a continuous production | presentation operation | movement until a time. Along with such an effect operation, or separately from such an effect operation, for example, when displaying an effect image indicating the number of times of execution of a round, each time a grand prize opening is opened and execution of a new round is started In addition, an effect operation in which the display content or the like changes may be executed.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command that designates execution of an effect operation corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, such as display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command and the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result and the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the prior determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  The command B001H is for executing a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number so as to be specified in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  In this embodiment, the first and second start opening winning designation commands and the reserved memory number designation command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the notification content indicating which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied and the notification content of the total reserved storage number are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to the combination of the established start condition (the first start condition or the second start condition) and the total reserved memory number is prepared. The established start condition and the total number of reserved memories may be specified. Here, when it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one effect control command together with the total reserved memory number, for example, the upper limit value of the total reserved memory number is “8”. ”, It is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first It is only necessary to prepare a total of 10 types of effect control commands, that is, two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition, and eight types of effect control commands that can specify the total number of reserved memories. The types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table can be reduced.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 105 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control. Specifically, this means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type, and a random value MR2 for determining the reach 2. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR4 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104 and indicates the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. The numerical data may be updated by software using the random counter by the CPU 103. Further, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR4 is obtained. It may be updated. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The game control microcomputer 100 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. For the jackpot type determination random number MR2-2, the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is "big hit", is determined as "normal", "probability change", or "surprise change" For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number value MR3 is in the range of “1” to “241”. Takes the value of The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “251” is used. Take.

  6 and 7 show the decorative pattern variation pattern in this embodiment. FIG. 6 shows a case where the loss display prepared in advance corresponds to each of the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and the case where the variable display mode is “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss”. The variation pattern is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variation pattern PA1-1 to variation pattern PA1-5, variation pattern PB1-1, and A fluctuation pattern PB1-2, a fluctuation pattern PC1-1, and a fluctuation pattern PC1-2 are prepared. Further, a variation pattern PA2-1, a variation pattern PA2-2, a variation pattern PA3-1 to a variation pattern PA3-15 are prepared corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is “reach”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”).

  FIG. 7 illustrates a big hit variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, the variation pattern PA4-1 and the variation pattern correspond to the case where the variable symbol display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable variation”. PA4-2, variation pattern PA5-1 to variation pattern PA5-5, variation pattern PA6-1 to variation pattern PA6-10, variation pattern PA7-1 and variation pattern PA7-2, variation pattern PA8-1 to variation pattern PA8- 5. Variation pattern PA9-1 to variation pattern PA9-10 are prepared. Corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4 are prepared.

  In this embodiment, when the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display effect of “sliding” is executed and then the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is executed. As a variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state, the variation pattern PA3-4, variation pattern PA3-5, variation pattern PA3-9, variation pattern PA3-10, variation pattern PA3-12 to FIG. A fluctuation pattern PA3-14 is prepared in advance. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable display effect of “sliding” is executed and then the pseudo continuous change (re-change) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is executed or the decorative design is variable. As the variation pattern for changing the display state to the reach state, the variation pattern PA5-4, variation pattern PA5-5, variation pattern PA6-4, variation pattern PA6-5, variation pattern PA6-7 to variation pattern PA6- shown in FIG. 9, fluctuation pattern PA8-4, fluctuation pattern PA8-5, fluctuation pattern PA9-4, fluctuation pattern PA9-5, fluctuation pattern PA9-7 to fluctuation pattern PA9-9 are prepared in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the “sliding” variable display effect is executed when the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is two or three times. It becomes possible. It should be noted that even when the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is one time or when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed, the “sliding” variable display effect is performed. May be made executable. In this embodiment, when a variable display effect of “slip” is executed during variable display before execution of a certain pseudo continuous variation (revariation), the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is Even during the variable display after the execution, the “slip” variable display effect is executed. Further, for example, as in the variation pattern indicated as “one slip” in FIGS. 6 and 7, the variable display of “slide” is performed during the variable display before the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. In other words, the “slip” variable display effect may be executed during the variable display before the decorative symbol variable display state reaches the reach state after the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is executed.

  That is, in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the “slip” variable display effect is not executed in the variation pattern indicated as “no slip + revariation twice”, and the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect. In the variation pattern shown as “1 slip + 2 revariations”, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is 2 times, and the second re-execution is performed. The variable display effect of “slip” is executed during the variable display before the reach state is reached after the change, and the change pattern of “2 times of slide + 2 times of change” is simulated in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. The number of executions of the continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2, and the variable display effect of “slip” is executed after the first re-variation and during the variable display after the second re-variation. In addition, in the variation pattern shown as “no slip + 3 times re-variation”, the variable display effect of “slip” is not executed, and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous change (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is 3 times. In the variation pattern shown as “1 slip + 3 revariations”, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is 3, and the reach state is reached after the third revariation. During the previous variable display, a variable display effect of “sliding” is executed, and in the variation pattern indicated as “2 times of sliding + 3 times of re-variation”, pseudo-variable variation (re-variation) of the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” The number of executions is 3, and the variable display effect of “slip” is executed during the variable display after the second re-variation and after the third re-variation, and the variation pattern indicating “slip 3 times + re-variation 3 times” Then, the pseudo-series fluctuation in the variable display production of “pseudo-series” ( Variable display effect of "slippage" in the variable display in the number of executions after each re-change of 3 times and become the first to three-time change) is executed. In this way, the number of times the “sliding” variable display effect is executed is the variable display of “sliding” during the variable display after the last pseudo-continuous change (re-variation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. The case where the effect is executed is “slip once”, and in response to the case where the variable display effect of “slide” is executed during the variable display after executing the previous pseudo continuous change (re-change) one by one, The number of executions increases, such as “slide 2 times” and “slide 3 times”.

  FIG. 8 shows the variation pattern types of decorative symbols in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified based on, for example, an effect operation executed during variable display of decorative symbols.

  In this embodiment, corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-4, variation pattern type CB1-1. To fluctuation pattern type CB1-3 and fluctuation pattern type CC1-1 to fluctuation pattern type CC1-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-7 are prepared in advance.

  Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA3-7 and the fluctuation pattern type CA4-1 to fluctuation Pattern types CA4-7 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the variation pattern type CA5-1 and the variation pattern type CA5-2 are prepared in advance.

  In the setting example of the variation pattern type shown in FIG. 8, first, the variation pattern types are classified into different variation patterns depending on whether they are a loss variation pattern such as a non-reach variation pattern or a reach variation pattern or a big hit variation pattern. In addition, for example, in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the special figure fluctuation time is shortened corresponding to whether or not the probability change state or the short-time state is supported, and the special figure hold memory number (total hold memory number). Whether or not there is a variable display effect such as “pseudo ream” or “slip after chance stop”, so that one or more variation patterns are classified into each variation pattern type. 1 to variation pattern type CA1-4, variation pattern type CB1-1 to variation pattern type CB1-3, variation pattern type CC1-1 to variation pattern type CC1-3 are set. In the case of reach variation patterns, the types of reach production such as normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, presence / absence of variable display production such as “slip after chance stop”, and variable display production of “pseudo-continuous” Depending on whether the number of executions of re-variation by 1 or less (including no pseudo-ream) or 2 or 3 times, one or more variation patterns are classified into each variation pattern type. Each of the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-7 is set. Here, the type of reach that is a super reach such as Super Reach α or Super Reach β is more likely to be a “big hit” after the appearance of the reach, compared to a normal reach such as normal reach ( (Reliability) is high. By classifying the variation pattern into each variation pattern type according to the type of reach production, the proportion of each type of reach production executed is prevented from being extremely biased, and the variable display state of the decorative design is the reach state. Correspondingly, various types of reach production can be executed at a predetermined rate to improve the interest of the game.

  If it is a big hit variation pattern, whether the big hit type corresponds to “normal” or “probability” or “surprising”, the type of reach production such as normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, “chance eyes” Presence / absence of variable display effect such as “slip after stop”, presence / absence of re-lottery effect, and the number of re-variations executed by variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is 1 or less (including no pseudo-ream) Alternatively, the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-7 and the variation pattern type CA4-1 to be classified so that one or more variation pattern types are classified into each variation pattern type according to whether the number of times is three times. Each of the variation pattern type CA4-7, the variation pattern type CA5-1, and the variation pattern type CA5-2 is set. Note that the configuration of the variation pattern type is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8, and may be any configuration in which each variation pattern is classified based on an arbitrary effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and decorative patterns as shown in FIGS. Table data constituting a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. Are prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A is a big hit with the variable display result as “big hit” before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether to control to a gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B is a big hit with the variable display result as “big hit” before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether to control to a gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 18 is off or on, A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to one of the variable display results of “big hit” and “losing”. In this embodiment, the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. Accordingly, determination tables with different allocations of determination values for variable display results are prepared. In contrast, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may use a common determination table to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Thereby, the data capacity memorize | stored in ROM101 can be reduced.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. When the jackpot type determination table 131 determines that the variable display result is “big hit” and is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol is set to “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprise accuracy”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 18, is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to the “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprise” jackpot types. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “normal” or “probability” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15 round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the two round big hit state. In addition, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “normal” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not performed in the probability variation state, while being assigned to the jackpot type of “probability variation” or “surprising probability”. The table data indicating the determined value indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, the allocation of the determined value for each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, regardless of whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, a value in the range of “1” to “36” is assigned to the “normal” jackpot type. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a value in the range of “37” to “82” is assigned to the jackpot type of “probability variation”, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value Is “2”, a value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned to the jackpot type of “probability variation”. When the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a value in the range of “83” to “100” is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, no decision value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the variable display result is set to “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. When it is decided to control to the state, it is not decided to control to the big hit state with the round hit type as “surprise”.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of a reach determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, reach determination tables 132A to 132C shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C are prepared in advance as reach determination tables. The reach determination tables 132A to 132C indicate whether or not to change the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbols to the reach state when the variable display result is determined to be “lost” (predetermined). -2 is a table referred to for determination based on -2. Each of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C is selected according to a table selection setting as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is selected according to which of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short time state. In each of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C, numerical values (determination values) compared with the reach determination random value MR2-2 are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, and non-reach HB1. -2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 determination result not reach, and reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Assigned to one of the decision results.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is non-reach HA1-1 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “0”. And a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. Assigned. A value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determined values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “2”, Allocated to reach HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. The determination value in the range is assigned to the non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is any one of “5” to “8”, “1” to “1”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A determination value in the range of “233” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories, which is the number of held special figure games, is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3”), the variable display state of the decorative symbols is changed compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number The rate at which the decision to reach the reach state is made is low. If the average special symbol variation time in the non-reach variation pattern is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the reach variation pattern, the special figure pending storage number is a predetermined number or more. When the number is less than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened.

  12 and 13 show a configuration example of the jackpot variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B and FIG. 13 are prepared in advance as the jackpot variation pattern type determination table. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C determine the variation pattern type for determining the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected according to whether the gaming state is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short time state. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A is selected when in the normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133B is selected when in the probable variation state, and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133C is selected when in the short time state. .

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variable pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “probability change”, or “probability”. Numerical values (determined values) of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-7, variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-7, variation pattern type CA5-1, and variation pattern type CA5-2. Assigned to one. In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of big hit types is determined. ing. For example, in the variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 12A used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, depending on whether the big hit type is “normal” or “probability change” Thus, assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-7 is different. Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, if the big hit type is “normal”, the determination value is set for the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-7 (see FIG. 8) in which the re-lottery effect is not executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is “probable change”, the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-7.

  As described above, when the gaming state is any one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short time state, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type. In addition, a determined value may be assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. In this way, depending on the determination result as to whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type. .

  When the big hit type is “surprising probability”, the fluctuation pattern such as the fluctuation pattern type CA5-1 and the fluctuation pattern type CA5-2 is a change pattern to which no decision value is assigned when the big hit type is “normal” or “probability change”. A decision value is assigned to the type. In this way, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type becomes “surprise”, the control is determined to be a different variation pattern type from the case of controlling to the round 15 big hit state. be able to.

  When the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 12 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, and the gaming state is surely changed. In the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 12B used when the game is in the state, and the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 13 used when the gaming state is in the short-time state, the fluctuation pattern Assignment of the decision values to the types CA4-1 to CA4-7 is different. Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133B and 133C, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-2 to the variation pattern type CA3-7, while in the variation pattern type determination table 133A, the variation pattern type CA3- No determination value is assigned to 2 to the variation pattern type CA3-7.

  As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A (selected in the normal state) is selected according to the gaming state. ) When comparing the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133B (selected when in the probable change state) and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133C (selected in the short time state), the gaming state is any of the normal state, the probable change state, and the short time state. Depending on whether or not, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may differ. In addition, a determined value may be assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on the gaming state. In this way, depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types, and to change the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type. it can.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit type is “normal” or “probability change”, the number of executions of re-variation by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is 1 or less (including no pseudo-ream) or 2 The jackpot variation pattern is classified into either variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-7 or variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-7 depending on whether the number of times is three or three. Included. Therefore, depending on the result of determining whether the big hit type is “normal” or “probability change”, and whether the gaming state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect The determination ratio of whether or not to execute the variable and the determination ratio of the number of times of executing the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) when executing the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect can be varied.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the reach variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C are prepared in advance as reach variation pattern type determination tables. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C is selected according to whether the gaming state is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short time state. That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 134A is selected in the normal state, the reach variation pattern type determination table 134B is selected in the probability variation state, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 134C is selected in the time reduction state. . Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C is formed by using one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B and FIG. It may be selected as a use table depending on whether the decision to enter the reach state such as HB2-1 or reach HC2-1 has been made. That is, when the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A is used to determine one of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach variation pattern type determination table 134A is selected as a use table. When the reach HB2-1 is determined using the reach determination table 132B shown in FIG. 12 (B), the reach variation pattern determination table 134B is selected as the use table, and the reach HC2 using the reach determination table 132C shown in FIG. When it is determined to be -1, the reach variation pattern determination table 134C may be selected as the use table. This eliminates the need for data indicating table selection settings for selecting one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C corresponding to the gaming state.

  In each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C, the change is made depending on whether the determination result indicating the reach state is reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. Numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for determining the pattern type are assigned to the fluctuation pattern type CA2-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA2-7.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination table 134A, depending on which of the reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3 is determined as the reach state, the ratio determined for each variation pattern type is different. A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type. For example, a value (decision value) in the range of “1” to “190” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-1 and the other values are associated with the variation pattern type CA2-2 corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. ˜Assigned to variation pattern type CA2-7. Further, a value in the range of “1” to “195” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-1 corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-2. Further, a value in the range of “1” to “215” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-1 corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-3. The reach HA 2-1 is determined by the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A to be compared with the reach determination random number value MR2-2 corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value has been assigned. The reach HA 2-2 is assigned a decision value corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a decision value corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”), the variation pattern type CA2− in which normal reach production (normal reach) is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio determined to 1 becomes high. And, the change time of the average special symbol in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production that becomes the normal reach is set to be shorter than the change time of the average special symbol in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production that becomes the super reach. If this is the case, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In this embodiment, the reach variation pattern is changed depending on whether the number of re-variations executed by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is one or less (including no pseudo-continuous) or two or three times. It is included so as to be classified into any one of the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-7. Then, the variation pattern type CA2-1 to variation pattern depending on whether the number of re-variations executed by the variable display effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is one or less (including no pseudo-continuous) or two or three times. The assignment of the decision value to the type CA2-7 may be set differently in the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C and the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C. As an example, in the reach variation pattern type determination table 134A, a determination value is obtained for the variation pattern type CA2-6 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the case where the number of re-variations executed by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is three. Is not assigned. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133A, for the variation pattern type CA3-6 and variation pattern type CA4-6 corresponding to the case where the number of re-variations executed by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is three times. Even the decision value is assigned. In this setting example, if the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” reaches 3 times when the gaming state is the normal state, the variable display result becomes “big hit”. Is fixed. In this way, depending on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect and the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect are executed. In this case, it is only necessary that a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the determination ratio of the number of times of executing pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is different.

  The number of determination values allocated to the variation pattern type CA2-1 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C is allocated to the variation pattern type CA3-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-1 in the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C. The number is set to be larger than the number of determined values. On the other hand, the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern types CA2-2 to CA2-7 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C is the variation pattern type CA3 in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C. It is set to be smaller than the number of determination values assigned to −2 to the variation pattern CA3-7 and variation pattern type CA4-2 to variation pattern type CA4-7. Here, each of the variation pattern type CA2-1, the variation pattern type CA3-1, and the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern for executing the reach effect of the normal reach, and the variation pattern type CA2- 2 to variation pattern type CA2-7, variation pattern type CA3-2 to variation pattern CA3-7, variation pattern type CA4-2 to variation pattern type CA4-7 are super reach reach effects such as super reach α and super reach β. The variation pattern type includes a variation pattern that includes the variation pattern that executes the variable display effect of the “slip after the chance stop”. Therefore, by allocating the decision value to each variation pattern type in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C and the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C, the reach of the super reach and the variable display of “slip after the chance eye stop” are performed. When the effect is executed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” as compared with the case where the reach effect of the normal reach is executed.

  FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of a non-reach variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C are prepared in advance as non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is not set to the reach state. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected according to whether the gaming state is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short time state. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected when in the normal state, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected when in the probability variation state, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected in the time-short state. Selected. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include, for example, non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-. It may be selected as a usage table depending on which of the determination results indicating that the reach state is not set to 2. That is, when the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-5 are determined, the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as the use table, and the non-reach HB 1-1 and non-reach HB 1-2 are selected. If determined to be either, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and if determined to be either non-reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2, the non-reach variation pattern type The determination table 135C may be selected as the usage table. This eliminates the need for data indicating table selection settings for selecting any of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C corresponding to the gaming state.

  In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-. Depending on whether the value is 1 or non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the value of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-. 4, the variable pattern type CB1-1 to the variable pattern type CB1-3 and the variable pattern type CC1-1 to the variable pattern type CC1-3.

  In this embodiment, among variable pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, variable display such as “pseudo-continuous” or “slip after chance eye stop” Variation pattern types CB1-3 and variation pattern types CC1-3 for categorizing variation pattern types CA1-4 for performing effects and variation patterns PA1-4 (see FIG. 6) for performing “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects. It is included. In the setting example of the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 15A, a determination value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern types CA1-4, and the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination shown in FIG. In the setting example of the table 135B, determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types CB1-3, and in the setting example of the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 135C illustrated in FIG. The decision value is assigned. Therefore, even if the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state, some or all of the multiple types of variable display effects including the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect are displayed. The change pattern type to be executed can be determined.

  16 and 17 show a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern determination table, a hit variation pattern determination table 136 shown in FIG. 16 and a loss variation pattern determination table 137 shown in FIG. 17 are prepared in advance. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 136 includes a plurality of jackpot fluctuation patterns prepared in advance based on the determination result of the big hit type and / or the fluctuation pattern type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the pattern to be used among the variation patterns. When it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”, the loss variation pattern determination table 137 is based on whether or not a reach state is set, a determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the pattern to be used among the variation patterns to be the variation pattern. In the hit variation pattern determination table 136 and the loss variation pattern determination table 137, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is included in each variation pattern type according to the variation pattern type. Or it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 137, the pseudo continuous variation (re-generation) such as the variation pattern PA1-4 corresponding to the case of any of the variation pattern type CA1-4, the variation pattern type CB1-3, or the variation pattern type CC1-3. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern (see FIG. 6) in which a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is performed once (variation). With this setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable pattern PA1-4 is selected to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. be able to. In the case of the variation pattern type CA1-4, the determined value is also applied to the variation pattern (see FIG. 6) in which the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed, such as the variation pattern PA1-5. Assigned. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable pattern PA1-5 is selected, so that variable display such as “slip after chance eye stop” is performed. Production can be performed. Thus, for example, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that executes a part or all of a plurality of types of variable display effects including a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is provided, such as a variation pattern type CA1-4. When the display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is determined to be “non-reach”, a plurality of types of variable display such as a variation pattern PA1-4 are determined based on the determination of the variation pattern type CA1-4. By determining the variation pattern for executing any one of the effects as the usage pattern, a part or all of the plurality of types of variable display effects can be executed.

  For the variation pattern types CA1-4, in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 15A, out of the determined values compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, non-reach HA1- A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned to correspond to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2, and is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-3. Correspondingly, values in the range of “231” to “241” are assigned, and values in the range of “237” to “241” are assigned to the non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5, respectively. Yes. Here, in the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A, among the determined values to be compared with the reach determination random value MR2-2, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “0” to “1” to A value in the range of “204” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1, and a value in the range of “1” to “217” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the total pending storage number “1”. A value in the range of “1” to “220” corresponding to “2” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-3, and the total number of reserved storage is “3”, “4” corresponding to “2”. A value in the range of “1” to “230” is assigned to the non-reach HA1-4, and a value in the range of “1” to “233” is assigned to the non-reach corresponding to the total reserved memory number “5” to “8”. Assigned to HA1-5. Therefore, when the total number of stored storages is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 is lower than when the total number of stored storages is “0”. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4”, or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2” Compared with the case of “”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 is lower.

  In the setting example of the loss fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 in which the variable display effect such as “pseudo ream” and “slip after the chance eye stop” is not executed is 12000 milliseconds [ms]. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is set to 7000 milliseconds [ms], and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 is set to 5500 milliseconds [ms]. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed is set to 24000 milliseconds [ms]. Further, the special figure variation time in the variation pattern PA1-5 in which the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed is set to 32000 milliseconds [ms]. That is, when the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the special figure change time in the change pattern PA1-4 in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, and the variable display effect of “slip after the chance eye stop”. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-5 in which is executed is longer than the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern in which these effects are not executed. Then, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, it is a variation that executes a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” and a variable display effect of “slip after chance eye stop” as compared to the case of “0”. The ratio determined for the pattern type CA1-4 is low, and when the total reserved storage number is “3” or more, the variation pattern type CA1-4 is set as compared with the case where the total number is “3” or less. The percentage determined is low. Thus, the average variable display time can be shortened when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the hit variation pattern determination table 136, “1” to “50” are included in the variation pattern PA5-3 (see FIG. 7) of “no slip + revariation twice” corresponding to the variation pattern type CA3-3. A value in the range is assigned, and a value in the range of “51” to “125” is assigned to the variation pattern PA5-4 of “slip once + revariable twice” and “slip twice + revariable twice”. ”Is assigned a value in the range of“ 126 ”to“ 251 ”. Here, the number of times the “sliding” variable display effect is executed is the “sliding” variable display effect during the variable display after executing the last pseudo-continuous change (revariation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Corresponds to the case where the variable display effect of “slide” is executed during the variable display after the execution of the previous pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) one by one. The number of executions increases, such as “twice” and “slip three times”. Therefore, with the setting corresponding to the variation pattern type CA3-3, the variable display effect of “slip” is not executed at the first variation, and the execution ratio becomes zero. In addition, after the first re-variation, the “slip” variable display effect is executed at the same rate as the determination rate of the variation pattern PA5-5. Furthermore, after the second re-variation, the variable display effect of “slip” is executed at a ratio (total determination ratio) of the determination ratio of the variation pattern PA5-4 and the determination ratio of the variation pattern PA5-5. It will be. That is, when the variation pattern type CA3-3 is determined, “slip” occurs at least in any variable display after the first re-variation and after the second re-variation at a rate of about 4/5. A variable display effect is executed. Specifically, after the first re-variation, the ratio is about 3/10 (decision ratio of the variation pattern PA5-5), and after the second re-variation, the ratio is about 4/5 (the variation pattern PA5-4 or The variable display effect of “slip” is executed at the total determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA5-5.

  As described above, the ratio at which the “sliding” variable display effect is executed is set to be different depending on the number of times that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is executed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. In addition, this ratio is set so as to increase as the number of times that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) is executed in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect. This increases the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” as the number of executions of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” increases, and the variable display effect of “slide” Depending on whether or not it is executed, it is possible to give a player's expectation and frustration to whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is continuously executed. It should be noted that the ratio at which the “slip” variable display effect is executed may be set to be different for each number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change), or at least two different ratios may be set. If it is, it may be set so that the same ratio is included in a part. As an example, if the variation pattern type CA3-3 does not include the variation pattern PA5-4 of “slip once + revariation twice”, the variable display effect of “slide” is displayed after the first revariation. The ratio of execution and the ratio of execution of the “slip” variable display effect after the second re-variation are both the same as the determination ratio of the variation pattern PA5-5.

  In the hit variation pattern determination table 136, “1” to “25” are included in the variation pattern PA6-6 (see FIG. 7) of “no slip + three times revariation” corresponding to the variation pattern type CA3-6. A value in the range is assigned, and a value in the range of “26” to “75” is assigned to the variation pattern PA6-7 of “1 time of sliding + 3 times of re-variation”, and “2 times of sliding + 3 times of re-variation”. ”Is assigned a value in the range of“ 76 ”to“ 150 ”, and“ 151 ”to“ 251 ”is assigned to the variation pattern PA6-9 of“ slip 3 times + revariation 3 times ”. Is assigned a value in the range. With this setting, when the variation pattern type CA3-6 is determined, a “slip” is displayed during at least one of the variable displays after the first to third revariations at a rate of about 9/10. A variable display effect is executed. Specifically, it is a ratio of 0 at the first fluctuation, a ratio of about 2/5 after the first re-variation (decision ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA6-9), and a ratio of about 7/10 after the second re-variation. (Total determination ratio of fluctuation pattern PA6-8 or fluctuation pattern PA6-9) After the third re-change, the ratio is about 9/10 (total determination ratio of fluctuation pattern PA6-7 to fluctuation pattern PA6-9). , “Slip” variable display effect is executed.

  In this way, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the ratio at which the “slip” variable-display effect is executed for each execution number of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is determined by the variation pattern type. It is set differently depending on the result. And each variation pattern type when the variable display result is “big hit” is the type of jackpot type, the type of reach production, the presence / absence of re-lottery production, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display production of “pseudo run” It is set to include one or more variation patterns classified according to the number of executions (total number of times). Therefore, depending on the type of jackpot, type of reach production, presence / absence of re-lottery effect, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, etc. ), The ratio of execution of the “slip” variable display effect can be varied.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 137, “1” to “200” are included in the variation pattern PA3-3 (see FIG. 6) of “no slip + twice again” corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-3. A value in the range is assigned, and a value in the range of “201” to “246” is assigned to the variation pattern PA3-4 of “sliding once + revariation twice”. The value in the range of “247” to “251” is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA3-5. When the variation pattern type CA2-3 is determined by such setting, it is during variable display at least after the first re-variation and after the second re-variation at a rate of about 1/5. A variable display effect of “slip” is executed. Specifically, after the first re-variation, the ratio is about 1/50 (decision ratio of the variation pattern PA3-5), and after the second re-variation, the ratio is about 1/5 (the variation pattern PA3-4 or The variable display effect of “slip” is executed at the total determination ratio of the variation pattern PA3-5.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 137, “1” to “100” are included in the variation pattern PA3-11 (see FIG. 6) of “no slip + 3 times revariation” corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-6. A value in the range is assigned, and a value in the range of “101” to “175” is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA3-12 of “1 slip + 3 re-variations” and “2 slips + 3 re-variations”. ”Is assigned a value in the range of“ 176 ”to“ 225 ”, and“ 226 ”to“ 251 ”is assigned to the variation pattern PA3-14 of“ slip 3 times + revariation 3 times ”. Is assigned a value in the range. With this setting, when the variation pattern type CA2-6 is determined, a “slip” occurs at least during variable display after the first to third re-variation at a rate of about 3/5. A variable display effect is executed. Specifically, after the first re-variation, the ratio is about 1/10 (decision ratio of the variation pattern PA3-14), and after the second re-variation, the ratio is about 3/10 (the variation pattern PA3-13 or (Variable pattern PA3-14 total determination ratio), after the third re-variation, about 3/5 ratio (variation pattern PA3-12 to total determination ratio of variation pattern PA3-14), "slip" variable display Production is performed.

  In this way, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the ratio at which the “slip” variable-display effect is executed for each execution number of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is determined by the variation pattern type. It is set differently depending on the result. And each variation pattern type when the variable display result is “losing” depends on the type of reach production, the number of executions (total variation) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display production of “pseudo-continuous”, etc. Are set so as to include one or more variation patterns classified. Therefore, depending on the type of reach production and the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, “sliding” is performed for each number of times of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). The rate at which the variable display effect is executed can be varied. In addition, depending on whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit”, the rate at which the “sliding” variable display effect is executed is varied for each number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (revariation). be able to.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 18 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 18 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are set as the hold data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball in the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the order of winning in the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are set as the hold data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the order of winning of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151 </ b> C stores “first” start data that indicates winning in the first start winning opening, or “second” start data that indicates winning in the second start winning opening, The game ball is stored in association with the hold number according to the winning order of the game balls.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a probability variation flag, a time reduction flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 43 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 44, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The normal symbol process flag indicates which process should be selected and executed in the normal symbol process shown in step S16 of FIG. 43 in order to control the progress of the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20. Instruct.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination (predetermined) that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko machine 1 being controlled to a time reduction state or a probability change state, while being cleared in response to the completion of the time reduction state or the probability change state. Is turned off.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a variable symbol display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first start winning determination counter, a second start winning determination counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, and a total reserved memory number counter. , A short time counter, a round counter, etc. are provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104. This is for the CPU 103 to count the data so that it can be updated by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 is stored as random count values, which are periodically updated according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The first start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the first start port switch 22A is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal from the first start port switch 22A is ON, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the first start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has normally entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected. Judgment is made. In addition, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal is OFF or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The second start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 22B is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal from the second start port switch 22B is ON, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the second start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally detected. Is made. In addition, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is cleared when the signal state in the second start winning signal is determined to be off, or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The time reduction counter is used to count the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed until the time reduction control is ended when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the time reduction state. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, data indicating the count initial value “100” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is subtracted by 1 every time the special game is finished. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction flag is cleared and turned off, for example, to control to end the time reduction state and shift to the normal state.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. Then, when one round is completed and the next round is started, the round number count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating whether a game ball that has entered the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port is detected. As an example, “1” is set in the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, “2” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 10, if the jackpot type is “normal”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” and the jackpot type is “probable change”. For example, “1” is set to the big hit type buffer value, and “2” is set to the big hit type buffer value if the big hit type is “surprise”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, while the production control CPU 120 is built in the production control microcomputer, at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the production control microcomputer. The random number circuit 124 may be any one that is built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, the effect control board 12 is also connected to wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation button 30 has been detected from the operation detection switch 31.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 19, in this embodiment, on the side of the production control board 12, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, for temporary stop symbol determination before re-lottery Random number value SR2, random number value SR3 for determining a sliding pattern, random number value SR4 for determining a temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, random number values SR5-1 to SR5-3 for determining a first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stopping symbol, Numerical data indicating each of the random value SR6 for determining the execution of jackpot promotion effect, the random value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type, and the random values SR8-1 to SR8-4 for determining the first to fourth notice patterns are counted. Control possible. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. 42, for example, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1-1 to SR8-4 may be counted. Alternatively, by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and calculation processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 124, the numerical data indicating all or part of the rendering random number is updated. You may make it do. When the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter to count numerical data indicating all of the random number values SR1-1 to SR8-4. May be.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “decided” symbols that are variable display results of the ornament symbols, “left”, “middle”, “right” in the image display device 5. ”Is a random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol variable display ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before the re-lottery is “left”, “middle”, “right” before the re-lottery effect is executed when the re-lottery effect that is promoted during the change is executed. Is a random number value used to determine a decoration pattern of a normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The random value SR3 for determining the slip pattern is a random value used to determine one of a plurality of types of slip patterns corresponding to the contents of the variable display effect when the variable display effect of “slip” is executed. It is a numerical value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “71”. The random value SR4 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding is used when the variable display effect of “sliding” is executed, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are executed. Is a random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random values SR5-1 to SR5-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left” when the variable display effect is executed when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are random numbers used to determine a decorative symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR5-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR5-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the third pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random number SR5-3 takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”. The random value SR6 for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect is a random value used to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type determines whether or not to execute the notice effect by displaying a predetermined effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, and indicates the notice pattern type when it is decided to execute it. It is a random value used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. As an example, the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. Random values SR8-1 to SR8-4 for determining the first to fourth notice patterns determine the notice pattern corresponding to the content of the effect operation when executing the notice effect as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. It is a random value used to As an example, the random number value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “499”, and the random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is “1” to “1009”. The random number value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “1013”, and the random value SR8-4 for determining the fourth notice pattern is “1”. A value in the range of “509” is taken.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and controls.

  20A to 20C show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 160 </ b> A to 160 </ b> C are tables that are referred to in order to determine a combination of decorative symbols to be a definite decorative symbol from among a plurality of predetermined non-reach combinations. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 160A includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the predetermined decorative symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. Is a table referred to in order to determine the value based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 160A, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 are numerical values that are compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol ( Decision value) is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, which is a final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, among the final symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determination based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2. In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the symbol number “” of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol are assigned to “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes medium final stop symbols FZ1-3, which are finalized symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C among the predetermined decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determination based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like.

  Here, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 21. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, It is determined whether the output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, a determination value is assigned to a portion where the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. It is not done. With such a setting, when a confirmed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the determined decorative symbol combination can be prevented from being a reach combination or a jackpot combination. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is a combination of predetermined decorative symbols. The decision value is not assigned. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 as shown in FIG. 3A, the chance of chance TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. The determined value to be compared with the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion, and further to the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. The combinations of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 22 are combinations including the same decorative symbols as, for example, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 and the odd chances TC1 to TC4, and the “left”, “middle”, “right” The decorative symbols that are likely to be mistaken for the pseudo-reambling chances GC1 to GC8, the odd chances TC1 to TC4, etc., such as the arrangement order of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is different. Contains a combination of With such a setting, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, a random chance item TC1 to TC4, or the like. There can be no non-reach combinations similar to the eyes.

  FIGS. 23A and 23B show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol to be a reach combination. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 162A includes a left final stop symbol FZ2-1 that is a final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the final symbol symbols that are reach combinations. Reference is made to determine the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table to be. In the final stop symbol determination table 162A, symbol numbers “1” to “1” of decorative symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2) that are the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. 8 ”is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a third final stop symbol FZ2-3, which is a final symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol pattern display area 5C among the final symbol symbols that are reach combinations. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value SR1-3 for stop symbol determination.

  The middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, the variation of decorative symbols is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and “left” → “right” → “ In the case of deriving and displaying a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol in a predetermined order such as “middle”, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C where the decorative symbol is derived and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to determine “ The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a confirmed decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. In the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the third final stop symbol determination is performed for symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR1-3 for use is assigned.

  24A to 24C show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C are tables that are referred to in order to determine a combination of decorative symbols to be a definite decorative symbol from a plurality of predetermined jackpot combinations. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 163A is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as fixed decorative symbols that are normally a big hit combination. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are set. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the left and right middle symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as finalized symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the probability variable symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are used for determining the first final stop symbol. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR1-1 is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the confirmed decorative symbols that are any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4. The left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 are tables that are referred to for determining the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163C, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to each of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4.

  FIG. 25 shows a configuration example of the jackpot promotion promotion determination table 164 stored in the ROM 121. The jackpot promotion promotion determination table 164 indicates whether or not the jackpot promotion promotion execution is executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability change”. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random number value SR6 for determination. In the jackpot promotion promotion determination table 164, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value SR6 for determining the jackpot promotion promotion execution according to whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability change”. It is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and the determination result of whether to execute the promotion success effect or the promotion failure effect when the jackpot promotion effect is executed. Here, in the promotion success production, it is notified that it is in a probable state. On the other hand, in the promotion failure production, it is not notified that it is in a probable state.

  FIG. 26 shows a configuration example of the slip pattern determination table 165 stored in the ROM 121. The slip pattern determination table 165 shown in FIG. 26A shows a slip TP1-1 to a slip TP1-4 based on a random value SR3 for determining a slip pattern when a variable display effect of “slip” is executed. It is a table referred in order to determine a usage pattern from among a plurality of sliding patterns. In the slip pattern determination table 165, the variation pattern PA3-4, the variation pattern PA3-5, the variation pattern PA3-9, the variation pattern PA3-10, the variation pattern PA3-12 to the variation pattern PA3-14, the variation pattern PA5-4, the variation Pattern PA5-5, fluctuation pattern PA6-4, fluctuation pattern PA6-5, fluctuation pattern PA6-7 to fluctuation pattern PA6-9, fluctuation pattern PA8-4, fluctuation pattern PA8-5, fluctuation pattern PA9-4, fluctuation pattern PA9 -5, the variation pattern PA9-7 to the variation pattern PA9-9, the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the variation pattern (see FIGS. 6 and 7) in which the variable display effect of “slip” is executed. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value SR3 for determining the sliding pattern for each sliding pattern of It is allocated.

  FIG. 26B shows the contents of effects in the variable display effect of “slip” corresponding to the slip patterns of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4. In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-1, two or more decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right”) of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.), and then the decorative symbol display area 5R of the “right” is re-fluctuated at high speed and then stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display area 5R, an effect display of “right symbol high-speed re-variation” for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-2, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more decorative symbol display areas among the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Thereafter, the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L is changed by changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L by changing the decorative symbol at a high speed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The effect of “Revariation” is displayed. In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-3, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more decorative symbol display areas of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thereafter, the decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is changed to the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R by changing the decorative symbol again in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The effect of “Revariation” is displayed. In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-4, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more decorative symbol display areas among the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thereafter, the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L is changed by changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L by changing the decorative symbol again in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The effect of “Revariation” is displayed.

  FIG. 27 shows a temporary stop symbol determination at the time of sliding used to determine a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the variable display effect of “slip” is executed in the temporary stop symbol determination table stored in the ROM 121. A configuration example of a table is shown. In this embodiment, the slip temporary provisions shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D are used as the slip temporary stop symbol determination table for determining the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “slip” variable display effect. Stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are prepared in advance. Each slip temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are selected according to which of the slip patterns TP1-1 to slip TP1-4. That is, when the slip pattern is slip TP1-1, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the use table. When the slip pattern is slip TP1-2, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is the use table. If it is selected and slipping TP1-3, the sliding temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the usage table, and if it is slipping TP1-4, the sliding temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the usage table. The In each of the sliding temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display or final stop display) after executing the variable display effect of “slip” in the decorative symbol display area for changing the decorative symbols again. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped symbols are compared with the random number SR4 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding (determination) Value). Here, as a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed after execution of the “sliding” variable display effect, for example, one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is configured. Decorative symbols, decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped when the variable display state of decorative symbols is in the reach state, decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed when the re-lottery effect is executed, and when the re-lottery effect is not executed It is only necessary to include decorative symbols that are displayed in the final stop.

  For example, in the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 166A, the stop after executing the variable display effect of “slip” in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the slip pattern of the slip TP1-1. In response to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the symbols (right stop symbols), the temporary temporary stop symbols KZ1-1 are changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the temporary symbols when sliding. A value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR4 for determining the stop symbol is assigned. In the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 166B, the stop symbol after executing the variable display effect of “slip” in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the slip pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be left stop symbols), the temporary stop symbols at the time of sliding are displayed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-2. A value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value SR4 for determination is assigned. In the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 166C, the stop symbol after executing the variable display effect of “slip” in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the slip pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the right stop symbol), the temporary stop symbols at the time of sliding are displayed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. A value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value SR4 for determination is assigned. In the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 166D, the stop symbol after executing the variable display effect of “slip” in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed by the slip pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left stop symbols), the temporary stop symbols at the time of sliding are displayed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4. A value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value SR4 for determination is assigned. A different slip temporary stop symbol determination table may be selected depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “losing”. In this case, for example, when a “slip” variable display effect is performed in which the decorative symbol with the symbol number “7” displayed temporarily stopped is changed to a decorative symbol with another symbol number, the variable display result becomes “big hit”. The slip temporary stop symbol determination table may be set so as to increase the possibility (reliability). In addition, the decorative display variable display state temporarily displayed in the “sliding” variable display effect may be a reach state. In this way, for example, when the variable display effect of “sliding” is executed in the variable display effect of “pseudo-run”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state, The variable display effect is executed, and the decorative symbols constituting the quasi-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 can be temporarily stopped and displayed. As a result, since the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state, it is possible to make the player think that the variable display effect of the “pseudo-ream” has ended. Can be added.

  FIG. 28 shows the pseudo-continuous chance determination used to determine the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed in the temporary stop symbol determining table stored in the ROM 121. A configuration example of a table is shown. In this embodiment, the pseudo-continuous stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 28A to 28D is used as a pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Chance eye determination tables 167A to 167D are prepared in advance. In each of the pseudo-continuous chance determination tables 167A to 167D, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command or the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol is stopped. It is selected as a use table according to the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations (revariations) executed until it is displayed. The remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is, for example, “0” in the decorative pattern fluctuation (pseudo continuous fluctuation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 one time before that. The change of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) until the temporary stop symbol that becomes one of the above is stopped and displayed is “1”, and the temporary stop symbol that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is stopped and displayed twice before. The number of pseudo-variations until the pseudo-continuous variation in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped is executed so that the decorative symbol variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “2”. This corresponds to whether a continuous variation (a variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed. It should be noted that there is no difference in the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations depending on whether or not the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed. In this embodiment, the quasi-continuous chance eye determination table 167A is also used to determine a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped when the variable display effect “slip after chance eye stop” is executed.

  As an example, the pseudo-continuous chance determination table 167A is displayed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the designation of either the variation pattern PA1-4 or the variation pattern PF1-2. When the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations to be executed is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which becomes the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “right” decorative symbol The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol for temporary stop display in the display area 5R, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol for temporary stop display in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, are determined. Selected as a usage table. Further, the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 167A has a variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” such as any one of the variation pattern PA1-5, the variation pattern PA3-15, the variation pattern PA6-10, and the variation pattern PA9-10. In order to determine the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R Is also selected as the usage table.

  The quasi-continuous chance determination table 167B becomes the final stop symbol in response to the designation of the variation pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed in addition to the variation pattern PA1-4 and variation pattern PF1-2. When the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations executed until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is “1”, the left temporary stopped symbol which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L KZ2-1, right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which becomes the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and intermediate temporary, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. It is selected as a use table for determining the stop symbol KZ2-3. In the setting examples of the loss variation pattern and the big hit variation pattern shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, as the variation patterns other than the variation pattern PA1-4 and the variation pattern PF1-2, the variation pattern PA2-2, the variation pattern PA3-2, and the variation pattern. PA3-5, fluctuation pattern PA3-7 to fluctuation pattern PA3-15, fluctuation pattern PA4-2, fluctuation pattern PA5-2 to fluctuation pattern PA5-5, fluctuation pattern PA6-2 to fluctuation pattern PA6-10, fluctuation pattern PA7- 2. In “variation pattern PA8-2 to variation pattern PA8-5”, variation pattern PA9-2 to variation pattern PA9-10, and variation pattern PF1-4, “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects are executed.

  The pseudo consecutive chance determination table 167C includes a fluctuation pattern PA3-3 to a fluctuation pattern PA3-5, a fluctuation pattern PA3-8 to a fluctuation pattern PA3-14, a fluctuation pattern PA5-3 to a fluctuation pattern PA5-5, and a fluctuation pattern PA6-3. ~ Definite decorative pattern that will be the final stop symbol in response to any one of variation pattern PA6-9, variation pattern PA8-3 to variation pattern PA8-5, variation pattern PA9-3 to variation pattern PA9-9 being designated The left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, is displayed when the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations executed until the symbol is stopped and displayed is “2”. , Right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, and "middle" decorative symbol table Is selected as the usage table for determining a temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 While the design in which the temporary stop displayed in area 5C. In the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 167D, any one of the fluctuation pattern PA3-11 to the fluctuation pattern PA3-14, the fluctuation pattern PA6-6 to the fluctuation pattern PA6-9, and the fluctuation pattern PA9-6 to the fluctuation pattern PA9-9 is designated. In response to this, when the remaining number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations to be executed before the final decorative symbol that is the final stopped symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”, the temporary symbol is temporarily displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be stopped, the right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. Is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be displayed temporarily.

  28A and 28B, each of the pseudo-continuous chance determination tables 167A and 167B displays a stop display (temporary stop display) after executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. Or, depending on the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the symbols to be stopped (left stop symbols) to be displayed in the final stop), the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value SR5-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by the combination. Here, as the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed after executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, there are decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped when the variable display state of the decorative symbols is in the reach state, or a re-lottery effect. It is only necessary to include decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped when executed, decorative symbols that are finally stopped when the re-lottery effect is not executed, and the like.

  In the pseudo continuous chance determination table 167C shown in FIG. 28C, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and intermediate temporary stop symbol 2 determined using the pseudo continuous chance determination table 167B. -3 of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, depending on which of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to G3 are constituted by combinations of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, KZ3-3 A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR5-2 for determining the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to GC8. In the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 167D shown in FIG. 28D, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3 determined using the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 167C. -3 of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, depending on which of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC2 are composed of combinations of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, KZ4-3 A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR5-3 for determining the third pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to GC8.

  By determining a temporary stop symbol using these pseudo-continuous chance determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. 29, the pseudo-continuous variation (including the initial variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. In accordance with the number of executions, the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed for each of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. Either can be determined.

  In the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PA3-15, the fluctuation pattern PA6-10, and the fluctuation pattern PA9-10, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is executed once in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”. Later, the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed (see FIGS. 6 and 7). Therefore, in the case of these fluctuation patterns, the temporary stop symbol determined using the pseudo-continuous chance determination table 167A shown in FIG. 28A is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Then, the same temporary stop symbol may be displayed in the temporary stop display in the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop”. Alternatively, the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect are determined using the pseudo-continuous chance determining table 167B shown in FIG. The decorative design that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display effect may be determined using the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 167A shown in FIG.

  FIG. 30 shows a temporary stop symbol determination table 168 before the re-lottery used for determining the decorative symbol displayed temporarily when the re-lottery effect is executed in the temporary stop symbol determination table stored in the ROM 121. A configuration example is shown. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 before the re-lottery is a random number value for determining the temporary stop symbol before the re-lottery when the re-lottery effect is executed, and the decorative symbols to be displayed temporarily stop before the re-lottery effect is executed. It is a table referred to for determination based on SR2. In the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 before the re-lottery, the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “6” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3. 8 ”is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before re-lottery.

  FIG. 31 shows a configuration example of the display system notice pattern type determination table 170 stored in the ROM 121. The display system notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 31 (A) determines whether or not to execute a notice effect by displaying a predetermined effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a notice in the case of executing the notice effect. It is a table referred to in order to determine which pattern type is a plurality of pattern types based on a random value SR7 for determining a notice pattern type. In the display system notice pattern type determination table 170, there is no notice, display part notice CAY1 to part of the display system notice CAY3 according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command, and the display system notice pattern type decision disturbance is determined. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value SR7 is assigned. Depending on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, a decision value may be assigned to all of the display system announcement CAY1 to the display system announcement CAY3 without notice.

  FIG. 31 (B) shows the contents of the effect in the notice effect corresponding to each notice pattern type of display system notice CAY1 to display system notice CAY3. The notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1 is that an effect image showing a plurality of characters can be displayed in a predetermined order on the display screen of the image display device 5 as an effect action included in the notice effect of the “step-up action”. This is a notice pattern type in which a step-up notice effect for character display is executed. The notice pattern type of the display notice CAY2 is the notice effect included in the notice effect of “button operation notice”, and the image display device 5 is in a predetermined effect form according to the operation of the operation button 30 by the player. This is a notice pattern type in which a notice effect at the time of operation including an effect operation in which the display of the effect image on the display screen is changed. As an example, in the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2, in response to the operation button 30 being operated by the player, an effect display or the like indicating a line by a predetermined character is executed. As another example, in the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2, an effect operation such as a message image and sound may be executed in response to the operation button 30 being operated by the player. The notice pattern type of the display-type notice CAY3 is a step-up notice effect of character display that is executed up to one step or a plurality of steps as an effect operation that becomes a notice effect combining “step-up action” and “jog operation notice”. After that, it is a notice pattern type to be switched to a notice effect at the time of operation.

  32 and 33 show configuration examples of the display system notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171D stored in the ROM 121. The display system notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171D are for determining the presence or absence of a notice effect based on the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern when the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1 is decided. Or a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of display system notice patterns. Each of the display system announcement pattern determination tables 171A to 171D is selected according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and set as a use pattern. That is, when a variation pattern that does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the display system notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 32A is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is designated by the variation pattern designation command (one re-variation) is designated, The display system notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 32 (B) is selected. When a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is designated by the variation pattern designation command is two times (two re-variations), FIG. The display system notice pattern determination table 171C shown in A) is selected. When the variation pattern specifying command designates a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is 3 times (3 times revariation), FIG. The display system notice pattern determination table 171D shown in B) is selected.

  In the display system notice pattern determination table 171A, no notice is given or a part of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to display system notice pattern YAP1-4 corresponding to the variation pattern that does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Alternatively, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is assigned to all. In the display system notice pattern determination table 171B, the decorative pattern is variable corresponding to the variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is one (one revariation). During the first change from the start of display until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, and after the first re-variation after the start of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) Are compared with the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern in the combination of the notice effect operation without the notice or the combination of the display notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display notice pattern YAP1-4. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned. In the display system notice pattern determination table 171C, in response to a variation pattern in which the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is two times (two revariations), For each after the first re-variation and after the second re-variation, there is no prior notice or a combination of the notice effect operation combining the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR8-1 for pattern determination is assigned. In the display system notice pattern determination table 171D, in response to the variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is 3 times (revariation 3 times), After the first re-variation, after the second re-variation, and after the third re-variation, there is no notice or the notice effect operation of combining the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is assigned to the combination.

  FIG. 33C shows the character display contents in the notice effect by the notice patterns of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4. In the setting example shown in FIG. 33C, in the display system notice pattern YAP1-1, an effect image showing the character CH11 is displayed. In the display system notice pattern YAP1-2, an image showing the character CH12 is displayed following the display of the character CH11. In the display system notice pattern YAP1-3, an effect image showing the character CH13 is displayed following the display of the characters CH11 and CH12. In the display system notice pattern YAP1-4, an effect image showing the character CH14 is displayed following the display of the characters CH11 to CH13. Here, the effect image indicating the character CH11 is the effect image of the first step in the notice effect of the “step-up operation”. Further, the effect images showing the characters CH12 to CH14 are the effect images of the second step to the fourth step in the notice effect of the “step-up operation”, respectively. When one character among the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed, other characters may not be displayed, or a plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously.

  In the setting example of the display system preview pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 32A, the display system preview pattern YAP1-1 to the display system preview pattern YAP1-4 are displayed from the display system preview pattern YAP1-1. Decided values are assigned in order of the patterns YAP1-4 so that the possibility (reliability) that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. As an example, in the case of the loss variation pattern such as the variation pattern PA1-1, the variation pattern PA1-2, the variation pattern PA1-5, the variation pattern PB1-1, the variation pattern PC1-1, the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 and While the determined value is assigned to the display system notice pattern YAP1-2, the decided value is not assigned to the display system notice pattern YAP1-3 and the display system notice pattern YAP1-4. Here, the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 is assigned more decision values than the display system notice pattern YAP1-2. Further, in the case of the loss variation pattern of the variation pattern PA2-1, the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern YAP1-1 to the variation pattern YAP1-3, while the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 is allocated. Is not assigned a decision value. Here, more determined values are assigned to the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 and the display system notice pattern YAP1-2 than the display system notice pattern YAP1-3. On the other hand, in the case of big hit variation patterns such as variation pattern PA5-1, variation pattern PA6-1, variation pattern PA8-1, variation pattern PA9-1, display system announcement pattern YAP1-1 to display system announcement pattern. A decision value is assigned to YAP1-4. The display system notice pattern YAP1-3 is assigned more decision values than the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 and the display system notice pattern YAP1-2, respectively. Many determination values are assigned to each of the display system notice patterns YAP1-1 to display system notice patterns YAP1-3.

  In the case of the fluctuation pattern PF1-2, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, the fluctuation pattern PA1-5, the fluctuation pattern PB1-1, and the fluctuation pattern PC1 regardless of the big hit fluctuation pattern. A determination value similar to that in the case of any one of the loss variation patterns such as −1 is assigned. In the case of the fluctuation pattern PF1-3, the determination value is the same as that in the case of any one of the fluctuation fluctuation patterns such as the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 and the fluctuation pattern PA3-6 in spite of the big hit fluctuation pattern. Assigned. For this reason, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the display system notice pattern YAP1- is higher in the determination ratio than when the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”. 3 and the display-related notice pattern YAP1-2 and the display-related notice pattern YAP1-2 and the display-related notice pattern YAP1-2 are executed with a lower possibility (reliability) of the variable display result to be a “big hit” than the display-related notice pattern YAP1-4. The decision is made. With these settings, when the big hit type is “surprising” and controlled to the 2nd round big hit state, 15 rounds after the announcement effect with high reliability is executed at the same determination rate as when the 15th round big hit state is controlled. Preventing the decline of gaming entertainment when controlled to a two-round big hit state instead of a big hit state, and increasing the unexpectedness that the big hit type becomes “surprise” and the sudden hit mode start effect is executed it can. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the announcement effect is determined depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state or a special gaming state such as a short time state or a probable change state. You may make it vary a ratio. As an example, when the gaming state is a normal state, a decision is made to execute a highly reliable notice effect at the same determination rate as when the big hit type is `` normal '' or `` probability change '', while the gaming state is short In the state or the probability variation state, a notification effect with high reliability may be executed at a lower decision ratio than when the big hit type is “normal” or “probability variation”. As a result, when transitioning from the normal state to the probable change state, a highly reliable notice effect is easily executed and the expectation is enhanced. Execution is suppressed, and the unexpectedness that the jackpot type becomes “surprising” can be enhanced.

  In the setting examples of the display system notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 33 (B) and the display system notice pattern determination tables 171C and 171D shown in FIGS. 34 (A) and (B), the change display at each time (including the initial change). , The display system notice pattern is combined so that the notice effect is performed by any of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4. Therefore, when the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1 is determined, the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1 is displayed during the first change and during the variable display of the decorative pattern after the first to the third change. Is executed, and the execution of the notice effect by the display system notice pattern included in other notice pattern types such as the display system notice CAY2 and the display system notice CAY3 is restricted. Note that the notice effect by the member-type notice pattern can be executed in parallel (overlapping) with the notice effect by the display-type notice pattern. In addition, the notice effect by each of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to display system notice pattern YAP1-4 is “left” during the first change and during the variable display of the decorative pattern after the first to third re-changes. ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be executed in a period in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Alternatively, some or all of the notice effects produced by the display system notice patterns YAP1-1 to display system notice patterns YAP1-4 are “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Execution starts during the period in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed in all of the above, but continues after the decorative symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped) in some decorative symbol display areas It may be possible. In addition, it is not limited to what determines the notice effect operation | movement in each time of fluctuation display (including initial fluctuation) combining a plurality of display system notice patterns, for example, to the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) If one notice pattern prepared in advance is determined correspondingly, all of the notice effect operations in each variable display may be determined.

  Thus, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, if it is determined as the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. 1st notice execution period until the 1st pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of "pseudo-continuous" is performed among several periods in which the decorative design is variably displayed in all of 5R. (At the time of the first change) and the second notice execution period (after the first change to the third change) after the start of the quasi-continuous change (re-change) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. It is possible to determine to execute the notice effect by any one of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 included in the notice pattern type. Further, even after the start of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, the notice execution period in the previous variation display (after the first or second revariation) and the current variation display (2 The notice effect is executed by any one of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 included in the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1 in the notice execution period after the third or third change). The decision to do so can be made. In other words, in two notice execution periods provided before and after the execution of pseudo-continuous change, a decision is made to execute the notice effect based on the display-type notice pattern included in the same notice pattern type.

  According to the settings of the display system notice pattern determination tables 171B to 171D, the number of steps in the notice effect executed after the first re-variation is performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Is greater than or equal to the number of steps in the notice effect executed at the time of the first fluctuation. In addition, even after the start of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the number of steps in the notice effect executed in the next variation display (after the second or third re-variation) is The number of steps in the notice effect executed in the current variation display (after the first or second re-variation) is greater than or equal to the number of steps. In other words, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change increases, the number of steps in the notice effect does not decrease. Determine the contents of the production. As a result, the expectation that the variable display result will be a “big hit” as the number of executions of pseudo-variable increases is increased, but a decrease in the level of advancement due to a decrease in the reliability of the notice effect is prevented. it can. In the notice effect by each display system notice pattern, in addition to changing the number of steps executed as the notice effect of the “step-up operation”, the display mode of the same character displayed as the effect image (for example, character clothes) Different colors), different whether or not to display a predetermined effect image (for example, an effect image showing a cherry blossom pattern, etc.) in the first step, combining some or all of these, Or what is necessary is just to make it possible for a player to recognize that the reliability is different by changing any rendering operation and / or rendering mode during other announcement performances. Here, the degree of reliability is different by changing the performance operation and / or the production mode that are difficult for the player to recognize. May suggest.

  34 and 35 show configuration examples of the display system notice pattern determination tables 172A to 172D stored in the ROM 121. When the display system notice pattern determination tables 172A to 172D are determined as the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2, the presence / absence of the notice effect is determined based on the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern. Or a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of display system notice patterns. Each of the display system announcement pattern determination tables 172A to 172D is selected according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and set as a use pattern. That is, when a variation pattern that does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the display system notice pattern determination table 172A shown in FIG. 34A is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is designated by the variation pattern designation command (one re-variation) is designated, The display system notice pattern determination table 172B shown in 34 (B) is selected. When the variation pattern specifying command designates a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is two times (two revariations), FIG. A display system notice pattern determination table 172C shown in A) is selected. When a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is designated by the variation pattern designation command is 3 times (3 times revariation), FIG. The display system notice pattern determination table 172D shown in B) is selected.

  In the display system notice pattern determination table 172A, there is no notice or a part of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to a part of the display system notice pattern YAP2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern that does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Alternatively, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is assigned to all. In the display system notice pattern determination table 172B, the decorative pattern can be changed corresponding to the variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of the “pseudo ream” is one (one revariation). During the first change from the start of display until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, and after the first re-variation after the start of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) For each of the above, a combination of the notice effect operation combining the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 and the display system notice pattern YAP2-5 or the display system notice pattern YAP2-6, and a random value SR8- for determining the second notice pattern. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with 2 is assigned. In the display system notice pattern determination table 172C, in response to a variation pattern in which the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is two (re-variation twice), For each after the first re-change and after the second re-change, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1, the display system notice pattern YAP2-5, the display system notice pattern YAP2-7, or the display system notice pattern YAP2-8 A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is assigned to the combination of the notice effect operations combining the two. In the display system notice pattern determination table 172D, in response to the variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is 3 times (revariation 3 times), The display system notice pattern YAP2-1, the display system notice pattern YAP2-5, the display system notice pattern YAP2-7, and the display system after the first revariation, after the second revariation, and after the third revariation, respectively. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is assigned to the combination of the notice effect operation combining the notice pattern YAP2-9 or the display system notice pattern YAP2-10. .

  FIG. 35C shows the message contents in the notice effect by the notice patterns of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-10. In the setting example shown in FIG. 35C, in the display system notice pattern YAP2-1, “...” (No message) is notified in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30. In the display system notice pattern YAP2-2, a message “Good luck!” Is notified in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30. In the display system notice pattern YAP2-3, a message “CHANCE” is notified in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30. In the display system notice pattern YAP2-4, a message of “extreme heat” is notified in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30. As described above, the message notification operation in the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to display system notice pattern YAP2-4 is an effect operation executed in response to the operation of the operation button 30 in the notice effect of “button operation advance notice”. .

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 35C, in the display system notice pattern YAP2-5, “...” (no message) is notified in response to the first operation on the operation button 30, and “ "Good luck!" In the display system notice pattern YAP2-6, “...” (No message) is notified in response to the first operation on the operation button 30, and the message “CHANCE” is notified in response to the second operation. In the display system notice pattern YAP2-7, the message “Good luck!” Is notified in response to the first and second operations on the operation button 30, and the message “CHANCE” is notified in response to the third operation. In the display system notice pattern YAP2-8, the message “Good luck!” Is notified in response to the first operation on the operation button 30, and the message “CHANCE” is notified in response to the second and third operations. In the display system notice pattern YAP2-9, the message “Good luck!” Is notified in response to the first and second operations on the operation button 30, and the message “CHANCE” is notified in response to the third and fourth operations. Is done. In the display system notice pattern YAP2-10, the message “Good luck!” Is notified in response to the first operation on the operation button 30, and the message “CHANCE” is notified in response to the second and third operations. In response to the second operation, a message of “extreme heat” is notified.

  In the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 172A shown in FIG. 34A, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice is displayed for the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4. Decided values are assigned in order of the patterns YAP2-4 so that the possibility (reliability) that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. As an example, in the case of the loss variation patterns such as the variation pattern PA1-1, the variation pattern PA1-5, the variation pattern PB1-1, and the variation pattern PC1-1, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 and the display system notice pattern YAP2- On the other hand, a determined value is assigned to the display system notice pattern YAP2-3 and the display system notice pattern YAP2-4. Here, more determination values are assigned to the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 than the display system notice pattern YAP2-2. In the case of the loss variation pattern of the variation pattern PA2-1, the determined value is assigned to the display system notice pattern YAP2-2 and the display system notice pattern YAP2-3, while the display system notice pattern YAP2- No decision value is assigned to 4. Here, the display system notice pattern YAP2-2 is assigned more decision values than the display system notice pattern YAP2-3. On the other hand, in the case of big hit variation patterns such as variation pattern PA5-1, variation pattern PA6-1, variation pattern PA8-1, variation pattern PA9-1, display system announcement pattern YAP2-1 to display system announcement pattern. A decision value is assigned to YAP2-4. The display system notice pattern YAP2-3 and the display system notice pattern YAP2-4 are assigned more decision values than the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 and the display system notice pattern YAP2-2.

  In the setting examples of the display system notice pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 35 (B) and the display system notice pattern determination tables 172C and 172D shown in FIG. 36 (A) and FIG. After the second change, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1, display system notice pattern YAP2-5 or display system notice pattern YAP2-6, display system notice pattern YAP2-7 or display system notice pattern YAP2-8, display system notice The display system notice pattern is combined so that the notice effect by the pattern YAP2-9 or the display system notice pattern YAP2-10 is executed. Therefore, when the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 is determined, the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 is displayed during the first change and during the variable display of the decorative pattern after the first to the third change. Is executed, and the execution of the notice effect by the display system notice pattern included in other notice pattern types such as the display system notice CAY1 and the display system notice CAY3 is restricted. Note that the notice effect by the member-type notice pattern can be executed in parallel (overlapping) with the notice effect by the display-type notice pattern. In addition, the notice effect by each of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to display system notice pattern YAP2-10 is during the variable display of the decorative pattern at the time of the first change and after the first change to the third change. , “Left”, “Medium”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be executed in a period in which decorative symbols are variably displayed. Alternatively, some or all of the notice effects produced by each of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to display system notice pattern YAP2-10 are the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Execution starts during the period in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed in all of the above, but continues after the decorative symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped) in some decorative symbol display areas It may be possible. In addition, it is not limited to what determines the notice effect operation | movement in each time of fluctuation display (including initial fluctuation) combining a plurality of display system notice patterns, for example, to the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) If one notice pattern prepared in advance is determined correspondingly, all of the notice effect operations in each variable display may be determined.

  Thus, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, if the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 is determined, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. 1st notice execution period until the 1st pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of "pseudo-continuous" is performed among several periods in which the decorative design is variably displayed in all of 5R. (At the time of the first change) and the second notice execution period after the start of the quasi-continuous change (re-change) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (after the first to third re-change), the display-type notice CAY2 It is possible to make a decision to execute a notice effect by any one of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 or the display system notice pattern YAP2-5 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-10 included in the notice pattern type. It should be noted that, at the time of the first change, the present invention is not limited to the decision to execute the notice effect by the display system notice pattern YAP2-1, and there is no notice or display system notice pattern YAP2-2 to display system notice pattern YAP2-4. It may be possible to make a decision to execute the notice effect by any of the above. Further, even after the start of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, the notice execution period in the previous variation display (after the first or second revariation) and the current variation display (2 The notice effect is executed by any one of the display system notice pattern YAP2-5 and the display system notice pattern YAP2-10 included in the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 in the notice execution period after the third or third re-variation). The decision to do so can be made. In other words, in two notice execution periods provided before and after the execution of pseudo-continuous change, a decision is made to execute the notice effect based on the display-type notice pattern included in the same notice pattern type.

  According to the setting of the display system notice pattern determination tables 172B to 172D, the notice effect is executed after the first re-variation during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. The message content includes the same message content that is notified by the notice effect executed at the time of the first fluctuation, or the one that has a higher possibility (reliability) that the variable display result will be a “big hit” become. In addition, even after the start of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, a message that is notified in the notice effect that is executed in the next variation display (after the second or third re-variation) The content may be the same as the content of the message notified in the notice effect executed in the current variation display (after the first variation or the second variation), or the variable display result may be a “hit” Those with higher (reliability) are included. That is, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, each reliability of the message content notified in the notice effect is not lowered as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change is increased. The contents of the display system notice pattern are determined. As a result, although the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” increases as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change increases, the reliability of the notice effect is reduced, thereby reducing the entertainment interest of the game. Can be prevented. In addition, in the notice effect by each display system notice pattern, in addition to changing the message content notified in the notice effect of “button operation advance notice”, the same character that is displayed as an effect image and notifies the message content as a dialogue or the like Different display modes (for example, the color of clothes of characters), different whether or not to display a predetermined effect image (for example, a background image showing a cherry blossom pattern) together with a message, some of these Alternatively, the player may be able to recognize that the degrees of reliability are different by combining all of them, or by changing an arbitrary production operation and / or production mode during other notice productions. Here, the degree of reliability is different by changing the performance operation and / or the production mode that are difficult for the player to recognize. May suggest.

  In addition, according to the settings of the display system notice pattern determination tables 172B to 172D, the notice effect that is executed after the first re-variation is performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. The number of operations with respect to the operation button 30 is greater than the number of operations with respect to the operation button 30 in the notice effect executed at the time of the first fluctuation. In addition, even after the start of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the operation button 30 in the notice effect that is executed in the next variation display (after the second or third re-variation). The number of operations for is more than the number of operations for the operation button 30 in the notice effect executed in the current variation display (after the first or second re-variation). That is, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the display system notice pattern increases so that the number of operations for the operation button 30 in the notice effect increases as the number of times of the pseudo-variable change increases. Determine the content of the production. This increases the number of times that the player operates the operation button 30 with the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” as the number of executions of pseudo-variable increases, and the player's willingness to participate Can increase the interest of the game.

  FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 show configuration examples of the display system announcement pattern determination tables 173A to 173D stored in the ROM 121. The display system announcement pattern determination tables 173A to 173D are for determining the presence / absence of the announcement effect based on the random number SR8-3 for determining the third announcement pattern when the announcement pattern type of the display announcement CAY3 is decided. Or a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of display system notice patterns. Each of the display system announcement pattern determination tables 173A to 173D is selected according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and set as a use pattern. That is, when a variation pattern that does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the display system notice pattern determination table 173A shown in FIG. 36A is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is designated by the variation pattern designation command (one re-variation) is designated, The display system notice pattern determination table 173B shown in 36 (B) is selected. When a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is designated by the variation pattern designation command is two times (two re-variations), FIG. The display system notice pattern determination table 173C shown in A) is selected. When the variation pattern specifying command designates a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is 3 (3 times revariation), FIG. The display system notice pattern determination table 173D shown in B) is selected.

  In the display system notice pattern determination table 173A, there is no notice or a part of the display system notice pattern YAP3-1 to a part of the display system notice pattern YAP3-7 corresponding to the variation pattern that does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Alternatively, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to all. In the display system notice pattern determination table 173B, the decorative pattern is variable corresponding to the variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is one (one revariation). During the first change from the start of display until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, and after the first re-variation after the start of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) For each of the above, a notice effect operation combining the no notice or display system notice pattern YAP3-1 with the no notice or display system notice pattern YAP3-1, the display system notice pattern YAP3-8, or the display system notice pattern YAP3-9. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to the combination. In the display system notice pattern determination table 173C, in response to a variation pattern in which the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is two times (two revariations), For each after the first re-change and after the second re-change, there is no notice or display system notice pattern YAP3-1 or display system notice pattern YAP3-2 and display system notice pattern YAP3-1 or display system notice pattern YAP3. -3 and the display system notice pattern YAP3-1, the display system notice pattern YAP3-4, the display system notice pattern YAP3-8, or the display system notice pattern YAP3-9, A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR8-3 for determination is assigned. In the display system notice pattern determination table 173D, in response to a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is 3 times (revariation 3 times), After the first re-variation, after the second re-variation, and after the third re-variation, there is no notice or display system notice pattern YAP3-1 or display system notice pattern YAP3-2, and display system notice pattern YAP3-1. Any one of the display system notice pattern YAP3-3, the display system notice pattern YAP3-1, the display system notice pattern YAP3-3, or the display system notice pattern YAP3-8, and the display system notice pattern YAP3-3 or the display system notice pattern YAP3 -6 or a combination of a notice effect operation combined with a display notice pattern YAP3-8 or a display notice pattern YAP3-9 , The numerical values are compared with the third random value SR8-3 for notice pattern determination (determination value) is assigned.

  FIG. 37C shows the character display contents and message contents in the notice effect by the notice patterns of the display system notice pattern YAP3-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP3-9. In the setting example shown in FIG. 37C, in the display system notice pattern YAP3-1, “...” (no message) is notified in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30 following the display of the character CH11. In the display system notice pattern YAP3-2, following the display of the character CH11, a message “Good luck!” Is notified according to the operation of the operation button 30. In the display system notice pattern YAP3-3, the character CH12 is displayed following the display of the character CH11, and then the message “Good luck!” Is notified according to the operation of the operation button 30. In the display system notice pattern YAP3-4, the character CH12 is displayed following the display of the character CH11, and then the message “CHANCE” is notified in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30. In the display system notice pattern YAP3-5, the character CH12 is displayed following the display of the character CH11, and then a message of “extreme heat” is notified according to the operation of the operation button 30. In the display system notice pattern YAP3-6, the characters CH11 to CH13 are sequentially displayed, and then the message “CHANCE” is notified in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30. In the display system notice pattern YAP3-7, the characters CH11 to CH13 are sequentially displayed, and then a message of “extreme heat” is notified according to the operation of the operation button 30.

  In this way, the rendering operation in the display system preview pattern YAP3-1 to the display system preview pattern YAP3-7 is performed after the rendering operation in the “step-up operation” in the preview performance is executed up to one step or a plurality of steps, and then “button operation” is performed. It changes to the effect | action operation | movement performed according to operation of the operation button 30 by the notice effect of "notice". That is, in the display system notice pattern YAP3-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP3-7, after the effect operation in the notice effect of the “step-up operation” is executed to one step or a plurality of steps corresponding to one notice pattern. , It is switched to the effect operation in the notice effect of “button operation notice”. In addition, it is not limited to the one that switches from the “step-up action” notice effect to the “button operation notice” notice effect corresponding to one notice pattern, for example, by combining multiple notice patterns, It is also possible to switch from the “motion” notice effect to the “button operation notice” notice effect. In addition, the order in which the “step-up operation” notice effect and the “button operation notice” notice effect are executed can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the “button operation notice” notice effect is executed, It may be possible to switch to the “motion” notice effect.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 37C, in the display system notice pattern YAP3-8, the character CH11 and the character CH12 are sequentially displayed, and then “Good luck!” According to the first operation on the operation button 30. The message “CHANCE” is notified in response to the second operation. In the display system notice pattern YAP3-9, the character CH11 and the character CH12 are displayed sequentially, and then a message “Good luck!” Is notified in response to the first operation on the operation button 30, and the second operation is performed. In response, the message “Intense heat” is notified.

  In the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 173A shown in FIG. 36A, the display system notice pattern YAP3-1 to display system notice is applied to the display system notice pattern YAP3-1 to display system notice pattern YAP3-7. Decided values are assigned in order of the patterns YAP3-7 so that the possibility (reliability) that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. In the setting examples of the display system notice pattern determination table 173B shown in FIG. 36 (B) and the display system notice pattern determination tables 173C and 173D shown in FIGS. 37 (A) and (B), the change display of each time (including the initial change). , There is no notice, or any of the display system notice pattern YAP3-1 to display system notice pattern YAP3-4, display system notice pattern YAP3-6, display system notice pattern YAP3-8, and display system notice pattern YAP3-9 The display system notice pattern is combined so that the notice effect is executed. Therefore, when the display pattern type of the display system notice CAY3 is determined, the display pattern type of the display system notice CAY3 is displayed during the first change and during the variable display of the decorative pattern after the first to the third change. Is executed, and the execution of the notice effect by the display system notice pattern included in other notice pattern types such as the display system notice CAY1 and the display system notice CAY2 is restricted. Note that the notice effect by the member-type notice pattern can be executed in parallel (overlapping) with the notice effect by the display-type notice pattern. In addition, the notice effect by each of the display system notice pattern YAP3-1 to display system notice pattern YAP3-9 is “left” during the first change and during the variable display of the decorative pattern after the first to the third change. ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be executed in a period in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Alternatively, some or all of the notice effects by the display system notice pattern YAP3-1 to display system notice pattern YAP3-9 are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Execution starts during the period in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed in all of the above, but continues after the decorative symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped) in some decorative symbol display areas It may be possible. In addition, it is not limited to what determines the notice effect operation | movement in each time of fluctuation display (including initial fluctuation) combining a plurality of display system notice patterns, for example, to the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) If one notice pattern prepared in advance is determined correspondingly, all of the notice effect operations in each variable display may be determined.

  In this way, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, if the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY3 is determined, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. 1st notice execution period until the 1st pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of "pseudo-continuous" is performed among several periods in which the decorative design is variably displayed in all of 5R. Display system notice CAY3 in the second notice execution period (after the first to third re-variation) after the start of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. It is possible to determine to execute the notice effect by any one of the display system notice pattern YAP3-1 to display system notice pattern YAP3-9 included in the notice pattern type. Further, even after the start of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, the notice execution period in the previous variation display (after the first or second revariation) and the current variation display (2 The notice effect is executed by any one of the display-type notice pattern YAP3-1 to the display-type notice pattern YAP3-9 included in the notice pattern type of the display-type notice CAY3 in the notice execution period after the third or third re-variation). The decision to do so can be made. In other words, in two notice execution periods provided before and after the execution of pseudo-continuous change, a decision is made to execute the notice effect based on the display-type notice pattern included in the same notice pattern type.

  According to the settings of the display system notice pattern determination tables 173B to 173D, the number of steps in the notice effect executed after the first re-variation is performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Is more than the number of steps in the notice effect executed at the first change, or the message content notified by the notice effect executed after the first re-change is notified by the notice effect executed at the first change. The message content that is the same as the message content or the variable display result is more likely to be a “big hit” (reliability) is included. In addition, even after the start of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the number of steps in the notice effect executed in the next variation display (after the second or third re-variation) is , More than the number of steps in the notice effect executed in the current variation display (after the first or second re-variation), or the next variation display (after the second or third re-variation) The message content notified in the notice effect to be performed is the same as the message content notified in the notice effect executed in the current change display (after the first change or the second change), or the variable display result Those having a higher possibility (reliability) of being a “big hit” are included. That is, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the notice effect is notified so that the number of steps in the notice effect does not decrease as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change increases. In order to prevent the reliability of the message content from being lowered, the content of the production in each display system notice pattern is determined. As a result, although the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” increases as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change increases, the reliability of the notice effect is reduced, thereby reducing the entertainment interest of the game. Can be prevented.

  38 and 39 show a configuration example of the member system advance notice pattern determination tables 174A to 174D stored in the ROM 121. The member system notice pattern determination tables 174A to 174D indicate whether or not to execute the notice effect by operating the noticeable movable member 78 in a predetermined operation mode, and the notice pattern in the case of executing any of the plural patterns. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether to perform the determination based on the random number SR8-4 for determining the fourth notice pattern. Each member system notice pattern determination table 174A to 174D is selected according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and set as a usage pattern. That is, when a variation pattern that does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the member system notice pattern determination table 174A shown in FIG. 38A is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is designated by the variation pattern designation command (one re-variation) is designated, The member system notice pattern determination table 174B shown in FIG. 38 (B) is selected. When a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is designated by the variation pattern designation command is 2 times (2 times re-variation), FIG. The member system notice pattern determination table 174C shown in A) is selected. When a variation pattern in which the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is designated by the variation pattern designation command is 3 times (3 times revariation), FIG. The member system notice pattern determination table 174D shown in B) is selected.

  In the member system notice pattern determination table 174A, there is no notice or a part of the member system notice pattern YBP1-1 to part of the member system notice pattern YBP1-4 corresponding to the variation pattern that does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Alternatively, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR8-4 for determining the fourth notice pattern is assigned to all. In the member system notice pattern determination table 174B, the decorative pattern can be changed corresponding to the variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is one (one revariation). During the first change from the start of display until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, and after the first re-variation after the start of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) Are compared with the random value SR8-4 for determining the fourth notice pattern in the combination of the notice effect operation without the notice or the combination of the member notice pattern YBP1-1 to the member notice pattern YBP1-4. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned. In the member system notice pattern determination table 174C, in response to a variation pattern in which the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is two times (two revariations), For each after the first re-variation and after the second re-variation, there is no prior notice, or a combination of the notice effect operation combining the member system notice pattern YBP1-1 to the member system notice pattern YBP1-4, A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR8-4 for pattern determination is assigned. In the member system notice pattern determination table 174D, in response to a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is 3 times (revariation 3 times), After the first re-variation, after the second re-variation, and after the third re-variation, there is no notice or a notice effect operation combining the member system notice pattern YBP1-1 to the member system notice pattern YBP1-4. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR8-4 for determining the fourth notice pattern is assigned to the combination.

  FIG. 39C shows the step-up operation content in the notice effect by each notice pattern of the member system notice pattern YBP1-1 to member system notice pattern YBP1-4. In the setting example shown in FIG. 39C, in the member system advance notice pattern YBP1-1, an effect operation is performed once in which the advance notice movable member 78 is advanced to the front of the display screen in the image display device 5 and then retracted. Thus, the notice effect of only the first step is executed. In the member system advance notice pattern YBP1-2, the noticeable movable member 78 is moved forward to the front of the display screen in the image display device 5 and then retracted and then executed in two stages (step-up). The notice effect up to the second step is executed. In the member system notice pattern YBP1-3, the noticeable movable member 78 is changed (stepped up) in three stages by performing the effect operation of moving the noticeable movable member 78 to the front of the display screen in the image display device 9 and then retracting it three times. The notice effect up to the third step is executed. Further, in the member system notice pattern YBP1-1 to member system notice pattern YBP1-3, a light emitting body such as a decoration LED provided on the movable member 78 for notice is caused to emit light in a predetermined first light emission mode, or an image display device. A first member-linked effect such as displaying a predetermined effect image linked to the operation of the advance notice movable member 78 on the display screen 5 in the first display mode may be executed. In the member system advance notice pattern YBP1-4, the advance notice effect of only the first step is executed by executing once the effect operation in which the advance notice movable member 78 is advanced to the front of the display screen in the image display device 5 and then retracted. Is done. In the member system advance notice pattern YBP1-4, for example, the time for which the advance notice movable member 78 is advanced is made longer than the member system advance notice pattern YBP1-1, or the movable range of the advance notice movable member 78 is changed to the member system advance notice pattern YBP1. The noticeable movable member 78 may be operated in an operation mode different from that of the member system notice pattern YBP1-1, such as making it larger than -1. Further, in the member system notice pattern YBP1-4, a light emitting body such as a decoration LED provided on the noticeable movable member 78 is caused to emit light in a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, or the display of the image display device 9 is performed. Displaying a predetermined effect image linked with the operation of the movable movable member 78 on the screen in a second display mode different from the first display mode; A second member-linked effect such as outputting a sound with a tone different from that of the member system notice pattern YBP1-1, or combining some or all of these may be executed.

  In the setting example of the member system advance notice pattern determination table 174A shown in FIG. 38A, the member system advance notice pattern YBP1-1 to the member system advance notice pattern YBP1-4 are changed from the member system advance notice pattern YBP1-1 to the member system advance notice. Decided values are assigned in order of the patterns YBP1-4 so that the possibility (reliability) that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. In the setting examples of the member system notice pattern determination table 174B shown in FIG. 38 (B) and the member system notice pattern determination tables 174C and 174D shown in FIGS. 39 (A) and 39 (B), the change display of each time (including the initial change). , The member system notice pattern is combined so that the notice effect by any one of the member system notice pattern YBP1-1 to the member system notice pattern YBP1-4 is executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the combination of a plurality of member system notice patterns to determine the notice effect operation in each change display (including the first change). For example, the number of executions (total changes) of pseudo continuous change (re-change) If one notice pattern prepared in advance is determined correspondingly, all of the notice effect operations in each variable display may be determined.

  Thus, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the first continuous change until the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is executed, and the pseudo-continuous change in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. The notice effect by any one of the member system notice pattern YBP1-1 to the member system notice pattern YBP1-4 for operating the noticeable movable member 78 after the first to the third revariation after the start of (revariation). Can be made to execute. In addition, even after the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the previous variation display (after the first or second re-variation) and the current variation display (second or third time). ), It is possible to make a determination to execute the notice effect by any one of the member system notice pattern YBP1-1 to the member system notice pattern YBP1-4. In other words, in response to the change display before and after the pseudo continuous change is executed, a determination is made to execute the notice effect by the member system notice pattern.

  During the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect is executed, the notice effect using the advance notice movable member 78 executed after the first re-variation is performed as the advance notice movement executed at the first change. It may be the same as the notice effect using the member 78 or a higher possibility (reliability) that the variable display result is “big hit”. Further, even after the start of pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the advance notice movable member 78 executed in the next change display (after the second or third re-change) is used. The previous notice effect is the same as the notice effect using the notice movable member 78 executed in the previous fluctuation display (after the first or second re-variation), or the variable display result is “big hit”. What is necessary is just to become a thing with high possibility (reliability). That is, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the reliability of the notice effect using the noticeable movable member 78 does not decrease as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change increases. The contents of production in each member system notice pattern are determined. As a result, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is increased as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation increases. it can.

  The ROM 121 stores an effect control pattern table that stores a plurality of types of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control various effect operations. For example, the effect control pattern table includes a symbol variation control pattern table, various effect control pattern tables, and a notice effect control pattern table. In this embodiment, as the symbol variation control pattern included in the effect control pattern table, the symbol variation control pattern table 180A shown in FIG. 40A is prepared in advance, and various effect control pattern tables included in the effect control pattern table are prepared. Various effect control pattern tables 180B shown in FIG. 40B are prepared in advance, and a notice effect control pattern table 180C shown in FIG. 40C is prepared in advance as the notice effect control pattern table included in the effect control pattern table. ing.

  In the symbol variation control pattern table 180A, the image display device 5 in a period from when the variation of the decorative symbol is started to when the final symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, corresponding to a plurality of variation patterns, etc. Decorative design display operation on the display screen, presentation display operation at the reach effect and the start of the random mode effect, display operation of the decorative design in the variable display effect such as "pseudo ream", production operation in the re-lottery effect, etc. A plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of various effects operations may be stored as the symbol variation control pattern. The various effect control pattern table 180B only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls during the period when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In the notice effect control pattern table 180C, a plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of the effect operation in the notice effect are stored as a notice effect control pattern corresponding to a plurality of display-type notice patterns and member-type notice patterns prepared in advance. It only has to be done. The effect control pattern table may be an address management table that manages the storage addresses of pattern data constituting a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In this case, in the ROM 121, table data constituting the production control pattern table is stored in a predetermined storage area, and pattern data constituting individual production control patterns may be stored in an area different from this storage area. .

  FIG. 41A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Various effects such as a symbol variation control pattern stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180A, various effect control patterns stored in various effect control pattern tables 180B, and a notice effect control pattern stored in the notice effect control pattern table 180C The control pattern includes, for example, control data for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, and end code. It is only necessary to set various contents of the effect control, the timing of switching the effect control, and the like in time series.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the operation execution time (effect time) is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The movable member control data includes data indicating an operation mode of the movable member, such as a movable member 78 for notice connected to the motor 86, for example. That is, the movable member control data is data that designates a driving operation of the movable member. The operation detection control data includes, for example, an operation operation period using the operation button 30 such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation button 30 and data for specifying the control content of the operation when the operation is detected. Is included. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, movable member control data, and operation detection control data, and some process data includes a part thereof. It may be.

  FIG. 36B shows various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to blink a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control to move the advance notice movable member 78 in a mode specified by the member control data is performed, and control for receiving the operation on the operation button 30 and determining the content of the effect is performed in the operation valid period specified by the operation detection control data. . Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the light emitter such as 9) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, movable member control data # 1 to movable member control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n are effect operations in the effect device. Production control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n for designating execution of production control are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 42, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 42 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31, and the effect. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the control board 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Lighting signal) etc. are output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least a part of game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B, setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 43 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). 45 and 46 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the CPU 103 first reads the input port data stored in the predetermined input port register (step S201 in FIG. 45). Here, the input port register is a register in which, for example, a bit value indicating an input state of an external signal at an input port included in the I / O 105 is stored. In this embodiment, the input port data stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / ON) of the first start winning signal that becomes the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 22A. ) And the input port data stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / OFF) of the second start winning signal that becomes the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 22B. ON).

  It is determined whether or not the bit value [1] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S202). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S202; Yes), the second start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the second start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, Update so as to count up by adding 1 (step S203). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S202 (step S202; No), the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S204).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S204, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the bit number [0] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S205). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S205; Yes), the first start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the first starting winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, It is updated so as to count up by adding 1 (step S206). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S205 (step S205; No), the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S207).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S206 and S207, it is determined whether or not the first start winning determination count value has reached a predetermined determination value (for example, “2”) predetermined as a winning determination value. (Step S208). At this time, if the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S208; Yes), the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1” is set (step S209). Further, the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S210).

  If the first start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value in step S208 (step S208; No), a valid game ball winning in the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A. In response to this, it is determined whether or not the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211). At this time, if the second start winning determination count value does not reach the winning determination value (step S211; No), a valid game ball winning to the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B. In response to the absence, the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S212). Further, the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S213).

  After executing one of the processes of Steps S210 and S213, the CPU 103 reads the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (Step S214). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S214 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S215 in FIG. 46). At this time, if the read value in step S214 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, after it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 45 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value. The first start condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the one special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established. When it is determined in step S211 shown in FIG. 45 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value and it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, The second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the two special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S216). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the total pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter that indicates the total pending storage number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( Step S217). At this time, the CPU 103 may set and store start data corresponding to the start port buffer value at the head of the empty area in the start data storage unit 151C. For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, start data indicating “first” is set, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, start data indicating “second” is set.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S217, the CPU 103 obtains the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter. The numerical data shown is extracted (step S218). Numeric data indicating each random value extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, whereby each random value is stored (step S219). . For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 and MR2-1 are set in the first special figure storage unit 151A, while the starting port buffer value is “2”. In some cases, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 and MR2-1 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  After the random number value is stored in step S219, a setting for transmitting a start port winning designation command corresponding to the start port buffer value is made (step S220). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address (first address) of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address (head address) of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 43 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is done.

  Further, the CPU 103 stores the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, for example, to the presentation control board 12 for the reserved storage number notification command. Is set to transmit (step S221). The first start opening winning designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command and setting data for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command. When the second start opening winning designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command and setting data for transmitting the pending storage number notification command As the processes of steps S220 and S221, only the storage address of the command table corresponding to the start port buffer value is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer among the first start port winning specification command table and the second start port winning specification command table. do it. For example, when the special symbol process process ends, the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. Subsequent to the mouth winning designation command, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  When the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; Yes), after executing the process of step S221, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S222). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (step S222; “1”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S223), and then FIG. The process proceeds to step S211 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S222; “2”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S223). The start winning determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when both of the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of a game ball that is effective at the same time, both processes are executed by processing executed within 2 milliseconds. A process based on the fact that the switch has detected a start winning of a valid game ball is executed. That is, when it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 45 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing in steps S209, S210, and S214 shown in FIG. After executing the processing of steps S215 to S221 shown in FIG. 45, after the processing of step S223 is executed in response to the start port buffer value being “1” in step S222, the processing of step S211 shown in FIG. Proceed to processing. When it is determined in step S211 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing in steps S212 to S214 shown in FIG. 45 is executed, and then steps S215 to S221 shown in FIG. After executing the above process, the process of step S224 is executed in response to the start port buffer value being “2” in step S222, and then the start winning determination process is terminated. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  After executing the start winning determination process as described above, one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 shown in FIG. 44 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag. The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 151A and the second special symbol storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not a first start condition for starting or a second start condition for starting a special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Also, in the special symbol normal process, whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result A determination is also made. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the jackpot symbol and the special symbol game in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). One of the lost symbols) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, based on a pre-determined result whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit”, a reach determined result whether or not the variable display state of the decorative design is a reach display state, etc. A process of determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and after the special symbol starts variable display. It includes a process for measuring the elapsed time. Further, it is also determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the special figure variation time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for performing settings, a process for performing settings for transmitting a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12, and the like are included. Note that the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative design is specified. When the display time is reached, the determined decorative design may be confirmed by completely stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative design without receiving the effect control command from the main board 11. In the special symbol stop process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. If the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special chart process flag is set. Is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, an upper limit of a period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with the setting of the big hit type. As an example, when the jackpot type is set to “normal” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is set to “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to determine the jackpot type setting by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop supply of the drive signal with respect to the solenoid 82 used for special winning opening doors should just be performed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big winning opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big winning openings according to the jackpot type, This includes a process for making a setting for sending an end designation command when the maximum number of times of opening has been reached. Here, the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is set to “15” when the big hit type is “normal” or “probability variation”, and is set to “2” when the big hit type is “surprise”. ing.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period during which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by various effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. Processing that waits until the waiting time elapses and processing that performs various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state are included.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 103 first sums the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number based on, for example, the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. It is determined whether or not the total pending storage number as a value is “0” (step S241). At this time, if the total reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S241; No), start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S242). Here, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Following the processing of step S242, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved storage number count value, the total reserved storage number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C uses the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted upward by one entry (step S243). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S242 is “first” or “second” (step S244).

  If it is determined in step S244 that the start data is “first” (step S244; first), a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In response to the establishment of the 1 start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (step S245). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S244 that the start data is “second” (step S244; second), a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In response to the establishment of the second start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S246).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S245 and S246, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start-up data read in step S242 (step S247). For example, when the start data is “first”, as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a random value for determining the special figure display result The numerical data indicating MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are read out. On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is used for determining the special figure display result. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read out.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S247, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start data is decremented by 1 and the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number “ The stored contents of the pending data stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry (step S248). For example, when the start data is “first”, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored content of the held data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. Let On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored contents of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B are stored one entry at a time. Shift to the top.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S248, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the start data is selected and set as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lack”. (Step S249). For example, if the start data is “first”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A is set as a use table, while if the start data is “second”, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in B) is set as a use table. The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table set in this manner, so that the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the pending data read in step S247 is “big hit”. In accordance with whether or not the determined value assigned to the variable display result of “” is matched, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” (step S250).

  When it is determined in step S250 that the variable display result is “big hit” (step S250; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S251). ). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S252). The jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S252 based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type included in the pending data read in step S247. , “Normal”, “probability change”, and “probability” are determined as one of a plurality of preset jackpot types (step S253). If the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S246, the random hit value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type for the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determining table 131 is set. Is not assigned, the jackpot type will not be determined as “surprising”. Corresponding to the big hit type determined in this way, for example, by updating the value of the big hit type buffer (hit type buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the determined big hit type is stored (step S254). As an example, if the big hit type is “normal”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0”, “probable change” is set to “1”, and “surprise” is set to “2”.

  After executing the process of step S254 or when it is determined in step S250 that the variable display result is not “big hit” (step S250; No), whether to control the big hit gaming state in advance A determined special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state (step S255). As an example, if it is determined in step S250 that the variable display result is not “big hit”, the loss pattern corresponding to the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “lost” will be “ The special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S250 that the variable display result is “big hit”, “1”, “3”, which are big hit symbols, according to the big hit type determination result in step S253. , One of the special symbols indicating the number “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S255, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S256), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S241 (step S241; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S257), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In this variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a plurality of types of variation pattern types are selected. It is set as a use table for determining either of them (step S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), whether or not to reach the reach state according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. As the use table for determining whether or not, one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C is selected and set (step S263). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S264). Subsequently, a random value MR2-2 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S265). Then, based on the reach determination random number value MR2-2 extracted in step S265, the presence or absence of the reach state is determined by referring to one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C selected in step S263 (step S263). S266).

  Following the processing in step S266, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S266 is reach with the variable display mode “reach” (step S267). At this time, if the determination result indicates that the variable display mode is “reach” (step S267; Yes), one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. Then, it is set as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step S268). On the other hand, when the determination result is “non-reach” as the variable display mode (step S267; No), the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 135A˜ One of 135C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types (step S269).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S268, and S269, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S270). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S270, by referring to the use table set in any one of steps S262, S268, S269, the variation pattern type is selected from any of a plurality of types. (Step S271). If any of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set in step S262, the big hit type is determined based on, for example, the big hit type buffer value when executing the processing of step S271. It is only necessary to specify whether “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprising accuracy” is determined, and to determine the variation pattern type according to the specified jackpot type. Further, when any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C is selected and set in step S268, or any of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected and set in step S269. In this case, the variation pattern type may be determined according to the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach state in step S266.

  Here, in the processes of steps S270 and S271, the decorative symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Regardless, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S270 and S271, the numerical value data indicating the common random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used to change by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach state in step S266. The pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S271, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  By determining the variation pattern type in step S271, it may be determined whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. As an example, when the variation pattern type CA1-1 shown in FIG. 8 is determined by the process of step S271, the variation pattern type CA1-1 includes a variation pattern for executing a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Therefore, it is determined not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type CA2-3 shown in FIG. 8 is determined by the process of step S271, the variation pattern type CA2-3 is a pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”. ) Is executed twice, so that it is determined to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Further, for example, when the variation pattern type CA2-2 shown in FIG. 8 is determined by the process of step S271, the variation pattern PA3-1 does not execute the variable display effect of the variation pattern type CA2-2 as “pseudo-continuous”. And the variation pattern PA3-2 for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (see FIG. 17), the variable display effect for the “pseudo-continuous” simply by determining the variation pattern type in step S271. It is not determined whether or not to execute, and when the variation pattern is determined in step S274 described later, it is determined whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S271 in this manner, it depends on the determination result (predetermined result) whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type determined in step S271, and the like. A selection table for selecting one of the variation variation determination table 136 shown in FIG. 16 and the loss variation pattern determination table 137 shown in FIG. (Step S272). Subsequently, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S273). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S273, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S272 (step S274). .

  Here, in the processing of steps S273 and S274, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A when the first start condition is satisfied. Whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Instead, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S273 and S274, the variation pattern is determined by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S266. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S274, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  By determining the variation pattern in step S274, it may be determined whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. As an example, when the variation pattern type CA2-2 shown in FIG. 8 is determined by the process of step S271, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is determined if the variation pattern PA3-1 is determined by the process of step S274. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern PA3-2 is determined by the process of step S274, it is determined that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Further, by determining the variation pattern in step S274, it may be determined whether or not to execute the “sliding” variable display effect when executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. As an example, it is assumed that the variation pattern type CA2-3 illustrated in FIG. 8 is determined by the process of step S271. As shown in FIG. 6, the variation pattern type CA2-3 includes a variation pattern PA3-3 that does not execute a variable display effect of “slip” as “no slip + twice re-variation”, A variation pattern PA3-4 and a variation pattern PA3-5 that execute a variable display effect of “slip” as “twice” or “twice slip + twice again” are included (see FIG. 17). At this time, if the variation pattern PA3-3 is determined by the process of step S274, it is determined not to execute the “slip” variable display effect, while the variation pattern PA3-4 and the variation pattern PA3 are determined by the process of step S274. If it is determined to be any one of −5, it is determined to perform the “slip” variable display effect.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S274, a special diagram variation time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the variation pattern determination result is set (step S275). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S276). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  After executing the process of step S276, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the change of the special symbol (step S277). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by a transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 Stored in the designated buffer area. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. When the setting in step S277 is performed, every time the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 43 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. May be transmitted in this order. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S278), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer. Thereby, when the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 43 is executed after the special symbol stop process is finished, the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Is sent. After the setting in step S293, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S295). For example, in the process of step S295, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the probability variation flag and the short time flag to turn off, a process of clearing the short time counter for counting the number of remaining special game games in the short time state, and the like. Just do it. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether or not the probability variation state or the time reduction state is to be ended (step S297). For example, in the processing of step S297, when the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, the value of the time reduction counter (time reduction count value) is updated by, for example, 1 subtraction or 1 addition. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value. At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S297 may be ended. Note that the end determination based on the time reduction count value is performed only when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on. Alternatively, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the variable display result becomes “big hit”. Further, in the process of step S297, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability change state end determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and the probability change state end determination stored in the ROM 101 or the like in advance is extracted. It may be determined whether or not to end the probability change state by referring to the table or when the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability change state has reached a predetermined probability change end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S297, the process for ending the probability variation state may not be executed, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process for determining whether or not to end the probability variation state based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the probability variation state end determination is, for example, whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” in step S250 shown in FIG. It may be executed before determining (predetermined). After executing the process of step S297, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” (step S298), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 50, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening of the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 44, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S312). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type buffer value read in step S312 is “0” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S313). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “0” (step S313; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the short time state is performed (step S314). For example, in the process of step S314, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to the on state, and sets a count initial value (for example, “100” predetermined in advance) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. ) Is set in the hourly counter.

  When the big hit type buffer value is other than “0” in step S313 (step S313; No), setting for starting control to the probability variation state is performed (step S315). For example, in the process of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined count initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that performs time reduction control in the probability variation state. What is necessary is just to set to a time-count counter. In the probability variation state, when the time reduction control is continued until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time reduction counter need not be set. After executing one of the processes in steps S314 and S315, the special process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S316), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 51 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S 401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, a random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating a random number value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among the effect random numbers used for effect control is updated by software. To do. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, the effect control process process is executed (step S406), and the process returns to step S402. In the effect control process in step S406, for example, an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and a movable member 78 for notice. With regard to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operation of the movable member, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes in steps S160 to S165, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Run.

  The variation start waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variation start waiting process is provided in the image display device 5 depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. This includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” in response to the determination to start variable display.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative symbols, the final decorative symbol, temporary stop symbol, warning pattern, etc., depending on the variation pattern and variable display result, etc. The process to determine is included. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, a symbol variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and the like are set based on these determination results. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, various types of symbol variation control patterns, warning effect control patterns, and the like corresponding to the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 are used. Processing for reading out the control data and performing various effects control during variable display of the decorative design is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The decorative symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, various effect control patterns corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and the effect image based on the set contents is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Displaying or outputting sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect lamps by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 9 and processing for controlling various effects in the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” in response to, for example, receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, various effect control patterns and the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state are set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and voice control is performed. Sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, such as / extinguishing / flashing. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (step S501). . At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S503). As an example, in the process of step S503, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 20A is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from the random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 20B is selected and set. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 20C is selected and set. Subsequently, the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In this way, in the process of step S503, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Then, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols is a reach combination, a jackpot combination, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4, and a predetermined non-reach as shown in FIG. The combination can be prevented.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of confirmed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 23A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from the random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 23B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the third final stop symbol determining random number SR1-3 is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-3, the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, according to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, The symbol difference between the decorative symbol to be FZ2-2 and the decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  In this way, in the process of step S504, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. The decorative symbols to be the left and right final stopped symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. Then, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. 1, the design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  When the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit” ( Step S505). At this time, when the big hit type is “surprise” (step S505; Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting any of the odd chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined (step S506). . As an example, in the process of step S506, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 24C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from the random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1, FZ4-, which becomes any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  When the big hit type is not “surprise” in step S505 (step S505; No), the big hit middle promotion effect determination shown in FIG. The table 164 is selected and set (step S507). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR6 for determining the execution of the big hit middle promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S538). Based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6, the presence / absence of jackpot promotion is determined by referring to the jackpot promotion promotion determination table 164 (step S509).

  Following the processing in step S509, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S509 is “no promotion effect” that does not execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S510). At this time, if the determination result is “with promotion effect” as “promotion success” or “promotion failure” (step S510; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination is selected. Determine (step S511). As an example, in the process of step S511, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 24A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from the random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. In this way, when the jackpot promotion effect is executed, the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol, and the derivation display of the final stop symbol constituting the probability variable jackpot combination is prevented. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player or the like from feeling uncomfortable because the promotion effect during the big hit is executed even though the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed.

  If the determination result is “no promotion effect” in step S510 (step S510; Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is determined (step S512). Here, in the setting example of the jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 164 shown in FIG. 25, the jackpot promotion promotion effect is determined based on the determination result that the jackpot promotion promotion execution is not executed in response to the jackpot type being “probability change”. When the decision value to be compared with the random number SR6 for execution decision is assigned and the jackpot type is “normal”, the decision value is not assigned to the decision result that the promotion effect during the jackpot is not executed. . Therefore, the determination result of “no promotion effect” is obtained only when the jackpot type is “probability change”. As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 24B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from the random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  After executing any of the processes in steps S503, S504, S506, S511, and S512, the variable display effect setting process is executed (step S513). FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display effect setting process executed in step S513. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 54, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a “with re-lottery” variation pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. Is determined (step S701). In this embodiment, the variation pattern PA7-1, variation pattern PA7-2, variation pattern PA8-1 to variation pattern PA8-5 shown in FIG. Variation patterns PA9-1 to PA9-10 are prepared in advance.

  If the variation pattern is “with re-lottery” in step S701 (step S701; Yes), a temporary stop symbol before re-lottery is determined as a decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily before the re-lottery effect is executed. (Step S702). As an example, in the process of step S702, the pre-re-lottery temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 30 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before re-lottery is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the pre-re-lottery temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random number SR2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are selected. The combination is determined as a temporary stop symbol before re-lottery. Thus, when the re-lottery effect is executed, the decorative symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination are temporarily stopped before the decorative symbol variable display is finished, and the decorative symbols constituting the probability variable jackpot combination are temporarily stopped. Prevent display. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player or the like from feeling uncomfortable because the lottery effect is executed even though the decorative symbols constituting the probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed.

  If it is not the variation pattern of “with re-lottery” in step S701 (step S701; No), or after determining the temporary stop symbol before the re-lottery in step S702, the “pseudo train” or “slip after the chance eye stop” In order to execute a variable display effect such as “” or “slip”, a process of determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed is performed. At this time, first, the values of the variables M1, M2, N1, and N2 used for determining the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed are initialized to “0” (step S703). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern with “pseudo-continuous” that executes a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (step S704). In this embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-4, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PA3- shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 2 to variation pattern PA3-5, variation pattern PA3-7 to variation pattern PA3-15, variation pattern PA4-2, variation pattern PA5-2 to variation pattern PA5-5, variation pattern PA6-2 to variation pattern PA6-10, A fluctuation pattern PA7-2, a fluctuation pattern PA8-2 to a fluctuation pattern PA8-5, a fluctuation pattern PA9-2 to a fluctuation pattern PA9-10, a fluctuation pattern PF1-2, and a fluctuation pattern PF1-4 are prepared in advance.

  If the variation pattern is “with pseudo-continuous” in step S704 (step S704; Yes), the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” based on the variation pattern (total number of times) ) Is set in the variable M1 (step S705). At this time, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a “slip” fluctuation pattern for executing a “slip” variable display effect (step S706). In this embodiment, the variation pattern PA3-4, variation pattern PA3-5, variation pattern PA3-9, variation pattern PA3-9, and the like shown in FIGS. Variation pattern PA3-10, Variation pattern PA3-12 to Variation pattern PA3-14, Variation pattern PA5-4, Variation pattern PA5-5, Variation pattern PA6-4, Variation pattern PA6-5, Variation pattern PA6-7 to Variation pattern PA6-9, fluctuation pattern PA8-4, fluctuation pattern PA8-5, fluctuation pattern PA9-4, fluctuation pattern PA9-5, fluctuation pattern PA9-7 to fluctuation pattern PA9-9 are prepared in advance. If it is a variation pattern that executes a variable display effect of “slip” (step S706; Yes), the number of times of slip execution, which is the number of times (total number of times) of executing the variable display effect of “slide” by the variation pattern, The variable N1 is set (step S707).

  If it is not a variation pattern of “with pseudo-continuity” in step S704 (step S704; No), a variation pattern of “with slip” is not determined in step S706 (step S706; No), or the process of step S707 is performed. After the execution, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a variable display effect of “slip after chance eye stop” (step S708). In this embodiment, as a variation pattern for executing the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop”, the variation pattern PA1-5, variation pattern PA3-15, variation pattern PA6-10, variation shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. A pattern PA9-10 is prepared in advance. If the variation pattern is to execute a variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” (step S708; Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable M1 (step S709).

  If the variable pattern is not a variation pattern that executes the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” in step S708 (step S708; No), the value of the variable M1 is “0” after executing the process of step S709. It is determined whether or not there is (step S710). At this time, if the value of the variable M1 is “0” (step S710; Yes), the variable display effects such as “pseudo train”, “slip after the chance eye stop”, and “slip” are not executed. In order to execute the variable display effect, it is not necessary to determine the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed, and the variable display effect setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the variable M1 is a value other than “0” in step S710 (step S710; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the variable N1 matches the value of the variable N2 (step S711). . At this time, if the value of the variable N1 and the value of the variable N2 do not match, in order to execute the variable display effect of “slip”, the determination of the slip pattern (step S712) and the determination of the temporary stop symbol at the time of slip are performed. This is performed (step S713). As an example, in the process of step S712, the slip pattern determination table 165 shown in FIG. 26A is selected, and one of a plurality of slip patterns is set in the use table for determining the use pattern. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR3 for determining the slip pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3, the slip pattern is determined as one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the slip pattern determination table 165. In addition, after the slip pattern is determined in step S712, if the process of step S712 is executed again before the variable display effect setting process is finished, it is determined to use the already determined slip pattern. Alternatively, the slip pattern may be determined again. When re-determining the slip pattern, a plurality of numerical data serving as the random value SR3 for determining the slip pattern is prepared so that different slip patterns can be determined a plurality of times within the same variable display effect setting process. do it.

  In the process of step S713, as an example, any one of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D corresponding to the slip pattern determined in step S712 is selected. Set the table to be used for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding. At this time, if the slip pattern of the slip TP1-1 is determined, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected. If the slip pattern of the slip TP1-2 is determined, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected. If the selected slip TP1-3 slip pattern is selected, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected. If the slip TP1-4 slip pattern is determined, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is determined. Selected. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to any of the selected slip temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 and the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Then, a decorative symbol that is one of the right temporary stop symbol 1-3 and the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 is determined. In this case, in the slip temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D, the “right stop symbol” and “left stop symbol” are the variable display effects of “slip” in which the temporary stop symbol is determined in the process of step S713. It is only necessary to use a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporary stop display or final stop display) after.

  After the slip temporary stop symbol is determined in step S713, 1 is added to the value of the variable N2 (step S714). In addition, when the value of the variable N1 matches the value of the variable N2 in step S711 (step S711; Yes), or after executing the process of step S714, the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is determined (step S715). . Here, the value of the variable N1 indicates the number (total number of times) of executing the “slip” variable display effect if the process of step S707 is executed after being initialized to “0” in the process of step S703. It will be. On the other hand, after the value of the variable N2 is initialized to “0” in the process of step S703, 1 is added each time the process of step S714 is executed. Therefore, after the slip temporary stop symbol corresponding to the number of times that the variable display effect of “slip” is executed (total number of times) is determined, the value of the variable N1 matches the value of the variable N2 in the process of step S711. Will do.

  In the process of step S715, as an example, the value of the variable M2 is specified. If the specified value is “0”, the pseudo consecutive chance determination shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B is performed according to the variation pattern. One of the tables 167A and 167B is selected and set in a use table for determining a pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. At this time, if any one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, the fluctuation pattern PA1-5, the fluctuation pattern PA3-15, the fluctuation pattern PA6-10, the fluctuation pattern PA9-10, and the fluctuation pattern PF1-2, the pseudo consecutive chance determination table. 167A is selected, and if it is a variation pattern other than these, the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 167B is selected. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number value SR5-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR5-1, by referring to any of the selected pseudo consecutive chance determination tables 167A and 167B, the left middle right that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. In this case, “left stop symbol” in the quasi-continuous chance determination tables 167A and 167B means that the temporary stop symbol is determined in the process of step S715 when the value of the variable M2 is “0”. ”Or“ slip after chance stop ”may be used as long as it is a decorative design that is stopped (temporary stop display or final stop display) after execution of the variable display effect. If the variable pattern is to execute a variable display effect of “slip after chance eye stop”, the temporary stop symbol determined by the process of step S715 corresponding to the value of variable M2 is “0”. In order to execute a variable display effect of “slip after chance stop”, the decorative pattern is displayed temporarily.

  If the value of the variable M2 identified in the process of step S715 is “1”, it is determined whether or not the variable pattern is to execute a variable display effect of “slip after chance stop”. At this time, if the variable pattern is to execute the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop”, the temporary stop becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8 determined when the value of the variable M2 is “0”. The symbol may be determined to be used as a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in order to execute the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect. The determination may be made again. On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that does not execute the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop”, when the value of the variable M2 is “1”, the pseudo continuous chance shown in FIG. The eye determination table 167C is selected and set in the use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination random value SR5-2 is extracted from the random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR5-2, by referring to the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 167C, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ3-1 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, The combination of KZ3-2 and KZ3-3 is determined.

  Further, if the value of the variable M2 specified in the process of step S715 is “2”, the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 167D shown in FIG. 28D is selected and set in the use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value SR5-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR5-3, the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3, which is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, is determined.

  After the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is determined in step S715, 1 is added to the value of the variable M2 (step S716). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable M1 matches the value of the variable M2 (step S717). Here, the value of the variable M1 is initialized to “0” in the process of step S703, and then, if the process of step S705 is executed, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) is performed in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect. Is executed, and if the process of step S709 is executed, 1 is added corresponding to the execution of the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”. . On the other hand, after the value of the variable M2 is initialized to “0” in the process of step S703, 1 is added each time the process of step S716 is executed. Therefore, the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 corresponding to the execution number (total number of times) of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect and the variable display effect of “slip after the chance eye stop” is executed. After the temporary stop symbol to be any one of -GC8 is determined, the value of the variable M1 and the value of the variable M2 match in the process of step S717.

  If the value of the variable M1 matches the value of the variable M2 in step S717 (step S717; Yes), the variable display effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the variable M1 does not match the value of the variable M2 (step S717; No), the process returns to step S711. In this way, in the variable display effect setting processing, the processing of steps S711 to S717 is executed, so that the temporary stop is performed in order to execute the variable display effects of “pseudo ream”, “slip after the chance eye stop”, and “slip”. The decorative pattern to be displayed can be determined. FIG. 55 shows, as an example, a temporary stop symbol determination operation corresponding to a variation pattern in which the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is two or more. As shown in FIG. 55, each time the processing of steps S711 to S717 is repeatedly executed until the value of variable M1 matches the value of variable M2 in step S717, the value of variable M2 or the value of variable N2 is set. Correspondingly, a decorative design to be temporarily stopped and displayed by variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-continuous” is determined.

  After performing the variable display effect setting process as described above in step S513 shown in FIG. 53, the notice effect setting process is executed (step S514). FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S514. In the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 56, the effect control CPU 120 first uses the figure as a use table for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect by displaying the effect image and the notice pattern type in the case of executing the notice effect. The display system notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in 31 (A) is selected and set (step S731). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S732). Then, by referring to the display system notice pattern type determination table 170 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR7, there is no notice or display system notice CAY1 to display system notice CAY3 in advance according to the variation pattern. One of the plurality of prepared display system notice pattern types is determined (step S733).

  If it is determined in step S733 that one of the display system notice pattern types of display system notice CAY1 to display system notice CAY3 (step S734; No), according to the determined display system notice pattern type or variation pattern. Then, any one of the display system notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171D, 172A to 172D, and 173A to 173D is selected and set as a use table (step S735). That is, if the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1 is determined in step S733, one of the display system notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171D is selected according to the variation pattern, and the display of the display system notice CAY2 is displayed. If it is determined as the system advance notice pattern type, any one of the display system advance notice pattern determination tables 172A to 172D is selected according to the change pattern, and if it is determined as the display system advance notice pattern type of the display system advance notice CAY3, it is changed. One of the display system notice pattern determination tables 173A to 173D is selected according to the pattern. Further, according to the display system notice pattern type, random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns from, for example, a random counter provided in the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the like. Is extracted (step S736). That is, when the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1 is determined in step S733, numerical data indicating the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is extracted and the display system of the display system notice CAY2 is displayed. When the notice pattern type is determined, numerical data indicating the random number value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is extracted, and when it is decided as the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY3, the third notice is obtained. Numerical data indicating the random number SR8-3 for pattern determination is extracted.

  After that, by referring to the usage table selected in step S735 based on either the fluctuation pattern or the numerical data indicating the random number values SR8-1 to SR8-3 extracted in step S736, the display system notice pattern is previously set. A plurality of prepared ones are determined (step S737). If it is determined in step S733 that there is no advance notice (step S734; Yes), and after the process in step S737 is executed, whether or not the advance notice effect by operating the advance notice movable member 78 is executed. As the use table for determining the notice pattern in the case of performing, one of the member system notice pattern determination tables 174A to 174D is selected and set according to the variation pattern (step S738).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S738, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value SR8-4 for determining the fourth notice pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S739). ). At this time, a plurality of member system advance notice patterns are prepared in advance by referring to the usage table selected in step S738 based on the fluctuation pattern and the numerical data indicating the random number SR8-4 extracted in step S739. (Step S740), the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  After executing the above notice effect setting process in step S514 shown in FIG. 53, a plurality of effect control patterns are determined in advance (step S515). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects any one of the symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180A corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, and uses pattern Set as. Further, for example, a plurality of notice effect control stored in the notice effect control pattern table 180C corresponding to the display system notice pattern determined in step S735 shown in FIG. 56 and the member system notice pattern determined in step S740. Among the patterns, the pattern to be used is selected and set. If it is determined in any of steps S733 and S735 without notice, the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the display system notice pattern may not be selected. If it is determined in step S740 without a notice, the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the member system notice pattern may not be selected.

  Following the processing in step S515, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (step S516). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S517). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S515 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the display screen 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the process during the decorative symbol variation (step S518), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1 subtraction) (step S531) and then displays the updated effect control process timer value Compared with the effect control process timer determination value indicated by the control pattern, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S532). And if it does not correspond to any timer judgment value (step S532; No), the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  If the timer judgment value is matched in step S532 (step S532; Yes), the presentation control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, etc.) stored in the presentation control pattern in association with the timer judgment value. A part or all of the lamp control data, the movable member control data, and the operation detection control data) or the end code is read (step S533). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in the process of step S532 match the effect control process timer value, a plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other. The effect control execution data may be read out in the process of step S533. Then, it is determined whether or not the end code has been read in step S533 (step S534). At this time, if it is determined that it is not an end code (step S534; No), after performing the effect operation control according to the effect control execution data read in step S533 (step S535), the decorative symbol variation End the middle process.

  For example, in the production operation control by the process of step S535, a display control command designated by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and a command corresponding to the sound number data designated by the voice control data is issued. Of transmitting to the sound control board 13, performing signal output specified by the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14, and transmitting motor driving signal specified by the movable member data to the motor 86. , Part or all may be performed sequentially or in parallel (if only one operation is performed). In addition, in the effect operation control by the process of step S535, whether or not it is an operation effective period in which the operation action of the player or the like with respect to the operation button 30 is effectively detected based on the operation detection control data read out in step S533. Determine. At this time, if it is the operation valid period, it is determined based on the detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31 whether or not the player's operation on the operation button 30 has been detected. And when operation with respect to the operation button 30 is not detected but an operation valid period is complete | finished, presentation operation control according to operation detection control data is complete | finished. On the other hand, when an operation on the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, the operation on the operation button 30 is performed by changing to the effect control pattern specified by the operation detection control data, for example. It is only necessary to perform control or setting for changing the rendering operation in response to the above.

  If it is determined in step S534 that it is an end code (step S534; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S536). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the process at the end of the decorative symbol variation (step S537), the process during the decorative symbol variation is ended. When a decorative symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, when it is determined in step S534 that it is an end code, “left”, “middle”, “right” ”In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, for example, temporarily stop display is performed so as to display the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol stop command is received in the decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 shown in FIG. In response to this, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a complete stop display (final stop display).

  Next, specific examples of various effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The effect control board 12 responds to the reception of the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11 based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example, The control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 in step S517 shown in FIG. 53, for example, so that the “left” and “middle” provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. ”And“ Right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol variation is started.

  58 and 59 show an example of a display operation in the image display device 5 when the notice effect by displaying the effect image is executed when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed. After the display system notice CAY1 to display system notice CAY3 are determined as one of the display system notice pattern types in step S733 shown in FIG. In the case where it is done, the notice effect by the display of the effect image is executed.

  As an example, it is assumed that the display system notice pattern type YAP1-4 is determined in step S737 after the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1 is determined in step S733. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 57, when the change is started, the effect control CPU 120 performs step S535 shown in FIG. 57 based on the notice effect control pattern determined corresponding to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 in step S515 shown in FIG. In response to the display control command transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 in the presentation operation control by the process of the above, the presentation display showing the character CH11 is displayed to execute the presentation display as the first step. . Subsequently, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), an effect image indicating the character CH12 different from the character CH11 is displayed, thereby executing an effect display as the second step. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), the number indicating “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the character is different from the characters CH10 and CH11. By displaying the effect image indicating CH12, the effect display as the third step is executed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are all stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The variable display state becomes the reach state.

  After reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 58 (E), for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), an effect image showing the character CH14 is displayed to execute an effect display as the fourth step. . Thus, the step-up notice effect that changes (steps up) to the fourth step (four steps) is executed when the decorative symbol variable display is executed corresponding to the display-type notice patterns YAP1-4. (See FIG. 33C). Further, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being the reach state. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. In addition, when the variable display result is “losing”, it is only necessary to stop and display the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach combination and to end the variable display of decorative symbols.

  As another example, it is assumed that the display system notice pattern YAP2-3 is determined in step S737 after the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 is determined in step S733. In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are shown in FIG. 59 (B). After starting the change as shown, for example, as shown in FIG. 59C, an effect image YH11 that prompts the player to press the operation button 30 is displayed. Thus, the operation promotion effect in the notice effect of “button operation notice” is executed. Note that, instead of displaying the effect image as shown in FIG. 59C, or together with the display of the effect image, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the decoration incorporated in the game effect lamp 9 and the operation button 30 are performed. An operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 may be executed by a lighting operation of a light emitter such as an LED for use, a driving operation of a movable member, or a combination of some or all of them.

  When the player depresses the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, and the detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31 to the effect control board 12 is turned on in response to this, for example, FIG. 59 (D1) An effect image YH12 showing the character lines as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the pressing operation on the operation button 30 is not detected within the predetermined period, the effect image YH11 is erased as shown in FIG. 59 (D2), for example, and the notice effect is ended. Thus, when the decorative symbol variable display is executed corresponding to the display system notice pattern YAP2-3, the effect operation is switched according to the detection of the player's operation on the operation button 30. An operation advance notice effect is performed to change the. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the decorative symbol variable display proceeds, such as temporarily displaying the decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. In other words, when the display system notice pattern of the display system notice CAY2 is determined, the rendering operation as the notice effect of the “button operation notice” is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. It can be executed in a period in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed (varied) in all of 5C and 5R.

  As yet another example, it is assumed that the display system notice pattern YAP3-4 is determined in step S737 after the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY3 is determined in step S733. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are shown in FIG. Start the fluctuation as shown. At this time, for example, as shown in FIGS. 58B and 58C, the characters CH10 and CH11 are sequentially displayed, and the same effect operation as in the case of the display system notice patterns YAP1-4 is executed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59C, for example, an operation promotion effect is displayed by displaying an effect image YH11 similar to that in the case of the display system notice pattern YAP2-3. If the player presses the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, for example, an effect image YH12 as shown in FIG. 59 (D1) is displayed. On the other hand, if the pressing operation on the operation button 30 is not detected within the predetermined period, the effect image YH11 is erased as shown in FIG. 59 (D2), for example, and the notice effect is ended.

  Thus, when the decorative symbol variable display is executed corresponding to the display system notice pattern YAP3-4, an effect operation is performed in which the character display changes (steps up) until the second step (step 2). After that, an effect operation according to the player's operation on the operation button 30 is executed, so that the step-up notice effect is switched to the operation notice effect. Note that the order in which the step-up notice effect and the operation notice effect are executed can be arbitrarily set. For example, the step-up notice effect may be executed after the operation notice effect is executed.

  Next, an example of operation when the notice effect by displaying the effect image is executed when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed will be described. As an example, when the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 is determined in step S733, the display system notice is obtained by the process of step S735 corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Any one of the pattern determination tables 172B to 172D is selected and set in the use table. Here, in the setting examples of the display system notice pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 34 (B) and the display system notice pattern determination tables 172C and 172D shown in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B), variable display of decorative symbols is started. The display system notice pattern YAP2-1 is determined as the usage pattern in response to the first fluctuation until the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is executed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Then, the display system notice pattern YAP2-5 to the display system corresponding to each of the first to third re-variations after the start of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. One of the notice patterns YAP2-10 is determined as the use pattern. Therefore, when the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 is determined, after the first notice change is performed by the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 at the first change, the display is displayed after the first to third re-variations. The notice effect by any one of the system notice pattern YAP2-5 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-10 is executed.

  Here, any of the announcement effects by the display system announcement pattern YAP2-5 to the display system announcement pattern YAP2-10 may cause the variable display result to be a “hit” as compared to the announcement effect by the display system announcement pattern YAP2-1. It is a notice effect for notifying that (reliability) is high, and is a notice effect that increases the number of operations for the operation button 30. Therefore, when the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 is determined, after the notice effect by the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 is executed at the first fluctuation, after the first to third re-variation, The notice effect that the variable display result is more likely to be a “big hit” than the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 and the number of operations for the operation button 30 is increased is displayed in the display system notice pattern YAP2-5 to the display system. It will be executed by one of the notice patterns YAP2-10.

  FIG. 60 shows a display operation example in the notice effect by the display system notice pattern YAP2-10. In the notice effect by the display-type notice pattern YAP2-10, for example, FIG. 60 (FIG. 60 () is displayed after the decoration symbols start to change in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown in A), an effect image YH11 that prompts the player to press the operation button 30 is displayed. Then, when the player presses the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, for example, an effect image YH12 showing a character dialogue as shown in FIG. Is notified. At this time, the effect image YH12 is displayed together with the effect image YH11 to further prompt the player to press the operation button 30.

  If the player presses the operation button 30 within a predetermined period when the display operation shown in FIG. 60 (B) is performed, for example, an effect showing a character dialogue as shown in FIG. 60 (C). By displaying the image, the message “CHANCE” is notified. At this time, an effect image that prompts the player to press the operation button 30 is displayed. If the player depresses the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, for example, an effect image showing the character dialogue as shown in FIG. 60D is displayed, and the message “CHANCE” is notified again. . In this case, an effect image that prompts the player to press the operation button 30 is displayed. If the player depresses the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, for example, an effect image indicating the character dialogue as shown in FIG. . When the display operation shown in any of FIGS. 60A to 60D is being performed, if a predetermined period has elapsed without detecting the pressing operation on the operation button 30, the display system notice pattern YAP2- 10 is finished, and the corresponding effect image is deleted. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the decorative symbol variable display proceeds, such as temporarily displaying the decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. In this way, in the notice effect by the display system notice pattern YAP2-10, the number of operations on the operation button 30 can be made up to a maximum of four times, and the notice effect operation for notifying a message corresponding to the detection of each operation is executed.

  In the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 56, after the display system notice pattern is determined by the process of step S737, the member system notice pattern is determined by executing the process of step S740 separately from the process of step S737. Thereafter, based on the notice effect control pattern determined corresponding to each of the display system notice pattern and the member system notice pattern in step S515 shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 120 produces an effect by the process of step 535 shown in FIG. Perform motion control. Thus, the notice effect by the display system notice pattern and the notice effect by the member system notice pattern can be executed in parallel (overlapping) with each other, and even when one of the notice effects is not executed, A notice effect can be executed. The notice effect by the display system notice pattern and the notice effect by the member system notice pattern both include an effect operation in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. That is, the notice effect of the “step-up operation” by displaying the effect image and the “step-up action” by the operation of the noticeable movable member 78 by the notice effect by the display system notice pattern and the notice effect by the member system notice pattern. A notice effect of “step-up operation” consisting of a plurality of systems, which is called a notice effect, can be executed.

  As an example, based on the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1 determined by the process of step S733, any of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 is executed by the process of step S737. After the determination, it is assumed that any one of the member system notice pattern YBP1-1 to the member system notice pattern YBP1-4 is determined by the process of step S740. In this case, one or more of the effect images showing various characters CH11 to CH14, for example, as in the setting example shown in FIG. 33C, based on the display system notice pattern determined by the process of step S737. The notice effect of “step-up operation” is displayed by displaying the effect image. Further, based on the member system notice pattern determined by the process of step S740, for example, as shown in the setting example shown in FIG. 39C, the “step up” is performed by operating the noticeable movable member 78 once or a plurality of times. The action “notice effect” is executed. Thus, the notice effect of “step-up operation” by displaying the effect image and the notice effect of “step-up action” by the operation of the movable member 78 for notice can be executed in parallel (overlapping). Note that the notice effect by displaying the effect image and the notice effect by the operation of the noticeable movable member 78 are not limited to those executed in parallel (overlapping) in the same period, but sequentially executed in different periods. May be.

  As another example, any one of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to display system notice pattern YAP2-10 is obtained by the process of step S737 based on the determination of the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 by the process of step S733. Then, it is assumed that any of the member system notice pattern YBP1-1 to the member system notice pattern YBP1-4 is determined by the process of step S740. In this case, based on the display system notice pattern determined by the process of step S737, the display of the effect image is switched in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30, as in the setting example shown in FIG. The notice effect of “button operation notice” in which the message is notified is executed. Further, based on the member system advance notice pattern determined by the process of step S740, for example, as in the setting example shown in FIG. 37C, “step” is performed by executing the operation of the advance notice movable member 78 once or a plurality of times. The notice effect of “up action” is executed. Thus, the “button operation advance notice” notice effect by switching the display of the effect image in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30 and the “step-up action” notice effect by the operation of the notice movable member 78 are performed in parallel (overlapping). ) Can be executed.

  On the other hand, in the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 56, when the display system notice pattern type is determined to be one of the display system notice CAY1 to the display system notice CAY3 by the process of step S733, it is changed to another display system notice pattern type. The notice effect by the included display system notice pattern is not executed. As an example, based on the determination of the display system notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY1 by the process of step S733, any of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 is executed by the process of step S737. Suppose that it was decided. In this case, one or more of the effect images showing various characters CH11 to CH14, for example, as in the setting example shown in FIG. 33C, based on the display system notice pattern determined by the process of step S737. The notice effect of “step-up operation” is displayed by displaying the effect image. In this case, since the display system preview pattern YAP2-1 to the display system preview pattern YAP2-10 is not determined by the process in step S737, the effect image is displayed according to the operation of the operation button 30. The notice effect of “button operation notice” in which a message is notified by switching the button is not executed.

  Here, if the notice effect of the “step-up operation” and the notice effect of the “button operation notice” are executed in parallel with the display of the effect image, there is a possibility that the competition (superimposition) of the effect images in each notice effect will occur. There is. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a notice effect that displays an effect image by a display system notice pattern included in any of a plurality of display system notice pattern types prepared in advance is executed, another display system notice pattern is displayed. By controlling so that the notice effect that displays the effect image by the display system notice pattern included in the type is not executed, the competition of the effect image in the notice effect is prevented (superimposition), and the player determines the content of the notice effect. Appropriate production operations that are easy to recognize are possible.

  In the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 32B, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is one (one re-variation). ), The combination of no notice and display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to display system notice pattern YAP1-4 is determined corresponding to the first change and after the first re-change. . In the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 33A, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is two (revariation twice). ), There are no notice and the combination of the display notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display notice pattern YAP1-4 corresponding to the first change and the first and second re-changes, respectively. It is determined. In the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 171D shown in FIG. 33B, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is 3 times (3 times revariation). ), The combination of no notice and display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to display system notice pattern YAP1-4 corresponds to the first change and after the first to third re-change. It is determined.

  For example, when the display system notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 32B is used, the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 is determined corresponding to the first change, and displayed after the first re-change. The system notice pattern YAP1-2 may be determined. In this case, only the display of the character CH11 is performed at the first change from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the temporary display of the decorative design in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. CH14 is not displayed. The characters CH11 and CH12 are displayed after the first re-variation after the start of the pseudo-variation (re-variation) in the “quasi-continuous” variable display effect, while the characters CH13 and CH14 are displayed. There is no display. In addition, the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 is determined corresponding to the first change, and the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 may be determined corresponding to the first re-change. In this case, only the character CH11 is displayed at the time of the first change, and the characters CH12 to CH14 are not displayed. Then, after the first re-variation, the characters CH11 to CH14 are sequentially displayed.

  Thus, for example, when the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is two times (two revariations), only character CH11 is displayed at the time of the first variation. An effect operation for displaying is performed, and after the first re-variation, an effect operation for displaying the characters CH11 and CH12 may be performed, or an effect operation for sequentially displaying the characters CH11 to CH14 may be performed. . That is, in the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 32B, the “step-up operation” is performed according to the number of times the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is executed in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”. Can be branched into a plurality of different production modes. Further, in the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 32B, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is one (revariation). 1 time), the characters CH11 to CH14 may be displayed by the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 after the first re-variation. In contrast, in the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 33A, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is two times. In the case of (2 times re-variation), after the first re-variation, the notice effect by the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 or the display system notice pattern YAP1-2 is executed, while the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 is used. Since the notice effect is not executed, the characters CH13 and CH14 are not displayed. In this way, according to the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, whether or not the effect mode in the notice effect of “step-up operation” is branched, Can be different. For example, even when the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is 2 (revariation 2 times), the characters CH11 to CH14 are displayed by the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 after the first revariation. May be set so that the ratio determined for the display system notice patterns YAP1-4 varies depending on the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation). This makes it possible to vary the ratio of branching the effect mode in the notice effect of the “step-up operation” in accordance with the number of executions (total number of times) of the pseudo change (re-variation) in the variable display effect of the “pseudo sequence”. it can. Thus, according to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determination ratio of whether or not to branch off the effect mode in the “step-up operation” notice effect is varied. It may be. In addition, in this example, the number of steps in the notice effect of the “step-up operation” varies depending on the number of times of the pseudo-continuous change (re-variation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect.

  In the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 34B, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is one (one revariation). ), The display system notice pattern YAP2-1 and the display system notice pattern YAP2-5 or the display system notice pattern YAP2-6 corresponding to the first change and after the first re-change. A combination is determined. In the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 172C shown in FIG. 35A, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is two times (two revariations). ), The display system advance notice pattern YAP2-1, the display system advance notice pattern YAP2-5, and the display system advance notice pattern YAP2 corresponding to the first change and after the first and second re-changes, respectively. -7 or a combination with the display system notice pattern YAP2-8 is determined. In the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 172D shown in FIG. 35B, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is 3 times (3 times revariation). ), The display system advance notice pattern YAP2-1, the display system advance notice pattern YAP2-5, and the display system advance notice pattern YAP2 corresponding to the first change and after the first to third re-changes, respectively. The combination of −7 and the display system notice pattern YAP2-9 or the display system notice pattern YAP2-10 is determined.

  For example, when the display system notice pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 34 (B) is used, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 is determined corresponding to the first change and displayed after the first re-change. The system notice pattern YAP2-5 may be determined. In this case, “...” (No message) is notified in response to the operation of the operation button 30 at the first fluctuation. Then, after the first fluctuation, “...” (no message) is notified in response to the operation button 30 being operated once, and “Good luck” in response to the operation button 30 being operated twice. ! "Message. In addition, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 may be determined in response to the first change, and the display system notice pattern YAP2-6 may be determined in response to the first re-change. In this case, “...” (No message) is notified in response to the operation of the operation button 30 at the first fluctuation. After the first re-variation, “...” (no message) is notified in response to the operation button 30 being operated once, and “...” is displayed in response to the operation button 30 being operated twice. “CHANCE” message is broadcast.

  Thus, for example, when the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is 2 (2 times re-variation), “...” ( No message) is notified, and after the first re-variation, “...” (no message) is notified, then the message “Do your best!” May be notified, or the message “CHANCE” will be notified. Sometimes it is done. That is, in the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 34 (B), the “button operation notice” is set according to the number of times the quasi-continuous change (re-variation) is executed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Can be branched into a plurality of different production modes. Also, in the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 34B, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is one (revariation). 1 time), the message “CHANCE” may be notified after “...” (no message) is notified by the display system notice pattern YAP2-6 after the first re-variation. In contrast, in the setting example of the display system notice pattern determination table 172C shown in FIG. 35A, the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is two. In the case of (revariation twice), the notice effect by the display system notice pattern YAP2-5 is executed after the first revariation, while the notice effect by the display system notice pattern YAP2-6 is not executed. The message “CHANCE” is not notified after “...” (No message) is notified. In this way, according to the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, whether or not to branch off the effect mode in the notice effect of “button operation advance notice”, Can be different. For example, even when the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is 2 (2 times revariation), “...” (no message) is displayed by the display system notice pattern YAP2-6 after the first revariation. ) Is notified and then the message “CHANCE” is set to be notified, and the display system notice pattern YAP2-6 is determined according to the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation). May be different. As a result, the ratio of determining whether or not to branch the effect mode in the notice effect of the “button operation advance notice” according to the number of executions (total number of times) of the pseudo change (revariation) in the variable display effect of the “pseudo series” May be different. In addition, in this example, the number of operations and the reliability of the operation button 30 in the notice effect of “button operation notice” differ depending on the number of executions of the quasi-continuous change (re-change) in the variable display effect of “pseudo series”. It has become a thing.

  In the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 56, after determining the display system notice pattern by the process of step S737, the member system notice pattern is decided by the process of step S740 separately from the process of step S737. Therefore, the notice effect by the display system notice pattern and the notice effect by the member system notice pattern can be executed in parallel (overlapping) with each other, and even when one of the notice effects is not executed, A notice effect can be executed. Note that the notice effect by the display system notice pattern and the notice effect by the member system notice pattern are not limited to those executed in parallel (overlapping) with each other. For example, in the notice effect control pattern corresponding to each notice pattern Based on the setting, the notice effects may be sequentially executed in different periods.

  Next, an operation example in the case where the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-run” is executed following the variable display effect of “slip” as the specific effect will be described. FIG. 61 shows an example of the decorative symbol display operation based on the variation pattern PA3-5. As shown in FIG. 6, the variation pattern PA3-5 is a variation pattern of “2 times slip + 2 times revariation”, and the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. The “slip” variable display effect is executed during the variable display after the first re-variation and after the second re-variation. For example, based on the determination that the big hit flag is off by the process of step S261 shown in FIG. 48 (step S261; No) and the determination that the reach is made by the process of step S267 (step S267; Yes), It is assumed that the variation pattern type CA2-3 is determined by the process of step S271 with reference to any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C selected by the process of step S268 and set in the use table. In this case, the variation pattern PA3-5 may be determined as the usage pattern by the process of step S274 with reference to the loss variation pattern determination table 137 selected by the process of step S272 and set in the usage table.

  When the variation pattern PA3-5 determined in this way is designated by the variation pattern designation command, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S504 shown in FIG. The final stop symbol is determined. 54, “2” that is the number of times of re-variation corresponding to “twice of re-variation” is set in the variable M1 by the processing of step S705 shown in FIG. 54, and “sliding twice” is performed by the processing of step S706. “2” which is the corresponding number of times of sliding is set to the variable N1. For example, as shown in FIG. 55, when both the value of the variable M2 and the value of the variable N2 are “0”, after the slip pattern is determined by the process of step S712, the final stop symbol and the like are processed by the process of step S713. Based on the above, with reference to any one of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D at the time of sliding, the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “slip” after the second re-variation is determined. At this time, the process of step S715 refers to the pseudo-continuous chance determination table 167B based on the final stop symbol and the like, and the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped at the second re-variation in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. Then, when the value of the variable M2 and the value of the variable N2 are both added to “1” by the processing of step S714 and step S716, the “slip” after the first re-variation is changed by the processing of step S713. The decorative design that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display effect is determined. Further, the process of step S715 refers to the quasi-continuous chance determination table 167C, and the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped at the first re-variation in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect are displayed as the quasi-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC1. It is determined as one of GC8.

  Based on the determination result of the decorative symbols as described above, for example, decoration is performed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R with the first variation as shown in FIG. After the variable display (fluctuation) of the symbol, as a temporary stop symbol at the first re-variation in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”, for example, a pseudo continuous chance GC7 ( The decorative symbols constituting (refer to FIG. 3A) are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the first pseudo variation (revariation) is performed by changing the decorative symbols again in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thus, after the first re-variation, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the decorative symbols are variably displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. (Variation) is performed.

  After the variable display as shown in FIG. 61 (C) is performed, for example, a decorative pattern of a non-reach combination different from the pseudo consecutive chance GC7 as shown in FIG. 61 (D) is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped is a variable display of “slip” after the first re-variation of a part of the temporary stop symbols at the second re-variation by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. What is necessary is just to substitute for the temporary stop symbol in the production. In this way, as a pre-slip temporary stop before the variable display effect of “slip” after the first re-variation is performed, a non-reach combination decorative pattern different from the quasi-continuous chance can be temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, for example, based on the determination of the slip pattern of the slip TP1-1 by the process of step S712 shown in FIG. 55, the decorative symbol is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R as shown in FIG. 61 (E). It is changed again at high speed (see FIG. 26B). Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), by changing the decorative symbol to be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R to the decorative symbol indicating the number “8”, As a temporary stop symbol at the time of the second re-variation, a decorative symbol constituting the pseudo consecutive chance GC7 is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  Following the temporary stop display of the pseudo consecutive chance GC7 as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the decorative symbols are displayed again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. By making it fluctuate, the second pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is performed. Thus, after the second re-variation, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), the decorative symbols are variably displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. (Variation) is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), for example, based on the final stop symbol determination result by the process of step S504 shown in FIG. 53, the number “7” is displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The decorative symbol shown is stopped (temporarily stopped), and then “4” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R as a temporary stop symbol in the “slip” variable display effect after the second re-variation. The decorative symbol indicating the number is stopped and displayed (temporary stop symbol). Thereafter, for example, based on the determination of the slip pattern of the slip TP1-1 by the process of step S712 shown in FIG. 55, the decorative symbol is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R as shown in FIG. Fluctuate at high speed. After the variable display effect of “slip” after the second re-variation is performed, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), for example, based on the final stop symbol determination result, the “right” decorative symbol By changing the decorative symbol to be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the display area 5R to a decorative symbol indicating the number “7”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the reach effect is started. Become.

  In the setting examples of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 136 shown in FIG. 16 and the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 137 shown in FIG. 17, the number of times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) is executed according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type. A determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that the rate at which the “slip” variable display effect is executed is different. As a result, the result of determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit” (pre-determined result), the big hit type, the type of reach production, the presence / absence of the redrawing effect, the “pseudo-ream” variable Depending on the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the display effect, the rate at which the “slip” variable display effect is executed for each number of times of execution of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is different. Can be made.

  Next, an operation example when the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed will be described. FIG. 62 shows an example of the decorative symbol display operation based on the variation pattern PA6-10. As shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern PA6-10 executes the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” after executing the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” once. In some cases, the pattern is used when the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit”. For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table selected by the process of step S262 and set in the use table based on the determination that the jackpot flag is turned on by the process of step S261 shown in FIG. 48 (step S261; Yes). It is assumed that any one of 133A to 133C is referred to and the variation pattern type CA3-7 is determined by the process of step S271. In this case, the variation pattern PA6-10 may be determined as the usage pattern by the processing in step S274 with reference to the hit variation pattern determination table 136 selected in the processing in step S272 and set in the usage table.

  When the variation pattern PA6-10 determined in this way is designated by the variation pattern designation command, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S511 or step S512 shown in FIG. The final stop symbol to be combined is determined. Further, by the process of step S705 shown in FIG. 54, after “1” that is the number of re-variations corresponding to “one re-variation” is set to the variable M1, a variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is performed. Corresponding to the execution (step S708; Yes), the value of the variable M1 is incremented by 1 by the process of step S709 to become “2”. When the value of the variable M2 is “0”, the pseudo-continuous chance determination table 167A is referred to based on the final stop symbol or the like by the process of step S715, and the temporary display in the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is performed. The decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined to be one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. At this time, in the variable display effect of “slip after chance chance stop”, the “right-slip” that changes the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the “right” decorative-symbol display area 5R is changed to “left”. ”And“ middle ”decorative symbol display areas 5 </ b> L and 5 </ b> C may be determined as“ left middle symbol slip ”for changing again the decorative symbol temporarily displayed. If it is determined that the “right symbol slip” is determined, the pseudo-continuous chance item determination table 167A is referred to as it is, and the temporary stop that becomes one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 based on the left stop symbol. What is necessary is just to determine a design. On the other hand, if it is determined to be “left middle symbol slip”, the item “left stop symbol” in the pseudo consecutive chance determination table 167A is different by a predetermined number of symbols (for example, one symbol). The temporary stop symbol which becomes any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined.

  Based on the determination result of the decorative pattern as described above, for example, when “right pattern sliding” is set, when variable display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern PA6-10 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (A1). In addition, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (fluctuated) in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (A2), the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC6 are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Following the temporary stop display of the pseudo consecutive chance GC6, as shown in FIG. 62 (A3), the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Is changed again, the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is performed.

  After the variable display as shown in FIG. 62 (A3) is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (A4), the decorative symbols constituting the quasi-continuous chance GC6 are all displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. 5R displays a temporary stop. At this time, as shown in FIG. 62 (A5), for example, the decorative symbols are changed again in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, while in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. The temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is continued. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (A6), by displaying the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. (Final stop display).

  Further, for example, in the case of “left middle symbol slip”, when the variable display of the decorative symbol by the variation pattern PA6-10 is started, as shown in FIGS. 62 (B1) to (B4), the first simulation is performed. 62A to 62A from the execution of continuous variation (re-variation) to the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo continuous chance GC6 in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same display operation as that in () is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (B4), after the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, FIG. 62 (B5) is displayed. As shown in the figure, the decorative symbols are changed again in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, while the decorative symbol display area 5R of “right” is kept temporarily displayed. . In this way, as shown in FIG. 62 (B6), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, thereby confirming the big hit combination. The decorative design is stopped (final stop display).

  When the variation pattern PA1-5 shown in FIG. 6 is determined as the usage pattern, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed during variable display of decorative symbols. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols constituting any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 in FIG. 5, after changing the decorative symbols again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, The confirmed decorative symbols that are the reach combinations are stopped and displayed (final stop display). When the variation pattern PA3-15 shown in FIG. 6 is determined to be a usage pattern, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed during variable display of decorative symbols. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols constituting any of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 in FIG. 5, the decorative symbols are changed again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then reach is reached. The finalized decorative symbols to be combined are stopped and displayed (final stop display). Thus, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbols constituting any of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, After the variable display effect of “slip after chance eye stop” is performed to change the decorative pattern of the part again, the decorative pattern of the combination of combinations corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” may be finally stopped and displayed. it can.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, when the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 is determined by the process of step S733 shown in FIG. Based on the settings of the display system notice pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 35 (B) and the display system notice pattern determination tables 172C and 172D shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and (B), the display system notice pattern is obtained by the process of step S737. Of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, among the plurality of periods in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed, The first notice execution period (at the time of the first change) until the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) in the variable display effect is executed, and the pseudo continuous change in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” In the second notice execution period after the start of (re-change) (after the first to third re-change), the notice effect by any of the display-type notice patterns included in the notice pattern type of the display-type notice CAY2 is executed. The decision to do so can be made. In this way, during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the “button operation advance notice” notice effect is executed even after the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is executed. The interest of the game can be improved by attracting the player's interest not only in the number of times (revariation) is executed but also in the notice effect. In addition, to improve the fun of the game by suppressing the decline in the effect of the announcement and the distrust of the player due to the fact that the notice effect of the “button operation notice” is not executed after the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is executed Can do.

  In the process of step S737 shown in FIG. 56, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, any of the display system notice pattern determination tables 171B to 171D, 172B to 172D, and 173B to 173D set in step S735 is performed. By determining the display system notice pattern with reference to the above, combinations of display system notice patterns corresponding to the first change and after the first to third re-changes are determined. Then, during the variable display of the decorative design in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed according to the setting of each display system notice pattern determination table 171B to 171D, 172B to 172D, 173B to 173D, ) The number of steps in the notice effect executed after the start of the operation is equal to or more than the number of steps in the notice effect executed at the time of the first change, or “button operation executed after the start of pseudo-continuous change (re-change)” The message content informed in the notice effect of “Notice” can be the same as the message content informed in the notice effect of “button operation notice” executed at the first fluctuation, and the variable display result can be “big hit” Those having higher reliability (reliability) are included. In this way, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the number of steps in the notice effect does not decrease as the number of times the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is executed increases. The contents of the effect in each display system notice pattern are determined so that the reliability of the message content notified in the notice effect of “button operation notice” does not decrease. As a result, although the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” increases as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change increases, the reliability of the notice effect is reduced, thereby reducing the entertainment interest of the game. It is possible to prevent the production effect from decreasing and the distrust of the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The number of operations for the operation button 30 in the notice effect of the “button operation notice” executed after the start of the pseudo change (revariation) during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the variable display effect of the “pseudo series” is executed. The number of operations may be larger than the number of operations for the operation button 30 in the notice effect of “button operation notice” executed at the first fluctuation. In this way, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the number of operations on the operation button 30 in the “button operation advance notice” notice effect as the number of times that the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is executed increases. The content of the effect in each display system notice pattern is determined so that the value increases. This increases the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” as the number of times that the pseudo-variation has been executed increases, thereby increasing the number of times that the player operates the operation button 30 and the participation of the player. Can increase motivation and improve the fun of the game.

  The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 uses any one of the variation pattern type determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 15 in the process of step 272 shown in FIG. Decide on. Thereafter, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, in the process of step S274 illustrated in FIG. 48, for example, using one of the variation pattern determination tables illustrated in FIG. 16 and FIG. Decide on either. Thereby, when adding the variation pattern type or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determined value in the variation pattern type determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. In addition, when adding a detailed variation pattern or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determination value in the variation pattern determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. That is, since the determination ratio of the variation pattern type and the determination ratio of the variation pattern can be set separately, the design change related to the variation pattern type and the distribution of the variation pattern can be easily performed.

  For example, in the variation pattern types CA1-4 shown in FIG. 8, the variation that executes the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. A variation pattern PA1-5 (see FIG. 6) for executing a variable display effect of the pattern PA1-4 and “slip after chance eye stop” is included. 48. In step S261 shown in FIG. 48, it is determined that the big hit flag is off corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is not “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is not set, and in step S267. In step S271, referring to the non-reach variation pattern determination table 135A selected in step S269 based on the determination that the decorative symbol variable display state is “non-reach” that does not set the reach state. If it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA1-4, it is determined in step S274 that the variation pattern is PA1-4 or variation pattern PA1-5, and a variable display effect such as “pseudo-continuous” or “slip after chance eye stop” Can be made to execute. As a result, even when the variable display state of the decorative pattern is not set to the reach state, various display effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “slip after the chance eye stop” can be executed, thereby making the game more interesting. Can be improved.

  Also, in the processing of step S271 and step S274 shown in FIG. 48, the variation pattern type and variation pattern are determined using different determination tables in accordance with the determination result by the processing of step S261 and step S267, and the reach state is set. The determination process does not compete between the case where the determination is made and the case where the reach state is not set. Therefore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type used to determine the variation pattern type can be made common numerical data regardless of the determination result whether or not to reach the reach state, Furthermore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern used for determining the variation pattern can be made common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. This reduces the amount of processing in the processing (for example, the main-side random number updating processing in step S14 shown in FIG. 43) executed to update the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4, and reduces the program amount. Can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to simplify the configuration by preventing the configuration of the random number circuit 104 from becoming complicated and increasing the storage area of the random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and the like. . Here, in the processing of step S270 and step S271, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by a common processing module regardless of the determination result in step S261 or step S267. Further, in the processing in step S273 and step S274, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns by a common processing module regardless of the determination result in step S261 or step S267. As a result, the amount of program can be reduced as compared with the case where the determination is performed using different processing modules according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state.

  When the quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed after the “sliding” variable-display effect as the specific effect, a non-reach combination different from the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of, the decorative symbols are changed and displayed again in a part of the decorative symbol display area where the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 are displayed. The decorative design to be stopped and displayed is changed so as to be a decorative design constituting either one. In this way, after the decorative symbols that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 are temporarily stopped and displayed, pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed in which the decorative symbols are changed again in all the decorative symbol display areas. The rate at which such a “slip” variable display effect is executed is determined by, for example, assigning a determination value to each variation pattern in the hit variation pattern determination table 136 or the loss variation pattern determination table 137, for example, a variable display of “pseudo-continuous”. It is set so as to differ depending on the number of times the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is executed, such that the number of times the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is executed increases in the effect. Also, as the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect increases, the rate at which the “slip” variable display effect is executed is increased. You may set so that it may differ according to the total frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation (revariation). As a result, not only the number of times the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed by the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”, but also after the decorative symbols of the non-reach combination different from the pseudo continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 are temporarily displayed. Depending on whether or not the “sliding” variable display effect is executed, the player's expectation or frustration is attracted to whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is continuously executed. Can improve the interests of the game.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, based on the determination of the notice pattern type of the display system notice CAY2 in step S733 shown in FIG. 56, the display system notice that executes the notice effect of “button operation notice” in step S737. When a pattern is determined and a member-based notice pattern for executing a notice effect by the operation of the noticeable movable member 78 is determined in step S740, the display of the effect image is switched according to the operation of the operation button 30. It has been described that the notice effect of the “step-up operation” is executed by executing the action of the noticeable movable member 78 once or a plurality of times in parallel (overlapping) with the notice effect of the “button operation notice”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a step-up notice effect and an operation notice effect that are executed in parallel, for example, a plurality of notice effects having different effect image display modes in the image display device 5 may be prepared. . That is, as the notice effect using the same effect device, a step-up notice effect and an operation notice effect that have different effect aspects may be executed in parallel. In this case, for example, if the display of the effect image in the step-up notice effect and the operation notice effect is set to be performed in a separate display area on the display screen of the image display device 5, the competition (superimposition) of the effect image occurs. It does not occur. In this way, when a notice effect using the same effect device is executed, the competition operation (superimposition) of the effect operations in each notice effect is prevented by changing the execution position or execution timing of each notice effect. May be. Then, the step-up notice effect and the operation notice effect using the same effect device are determined by determining the notice pattern corresponding to each of the step-up notice effect and the operation notice effect using the same effect device by separate processing. It should be possible to execute in parallel.

  In the above embodiment, the notification pattern type, the display system notification pattern, and the member system notification pattern determination ratio have been described as different depending on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a determination result (predetermined result) on whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit”, the big hit type, the type of reach effect, the re-lottery effect Presence / absence, presence / absence of various variable display effects, and the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in variable display effects of “pseudo-continuous”, or various combinations of some or all of these These determination ratios may be varied according to the determination result.

  In the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the message content notified by the “button operation advance notice” notice effect executed after the start of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) Only the message that is more likely to have a variable display result of “big hit” may be included than the message content that is notified by the notice effect of “button operation notice” executed at the time of the first change. As an example, when a combination of display system preview patterns is determined using the display system preview pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 34B, the display system preview pattern YAP2-5 and the display system preview pattern YAP2-6 are: It may be set so that the message “Good luck!” Is notified in response to the first operation on the operation button 30. This increases the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change increases, and the reliability of the notice effect of the “button operation notice” also increases. It can raise expectations and improve the fun of games. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the number of steps in the “step-up operation” notice effect executed after the start of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is the first time The number of steps in the notice effect of the “step-up operation” executed at the time of change may be larger (they will not be the same). This increases the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” as the number of executions of pseudo-continuous fluctuation increases, and the reliability of the notice effect of the “step-up operation” is also increased. It can raise expectations and improve the fun of games.

  The number of operations for the operation button 30 in the notice effect of the “button operation notice” executed after the start of the pseudo change (revariation) during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the variable display effect of the “pseudo series” is executed. May be the same as the number of operations performed on the operation button 30 in the notice effect of “button operation notice” executed at the first fluctuation. As an example, in the display system notice pattern determination table 172B shown in FIG. 34B, the display system notice pattern after the first re-variation is one of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to display system notice pattern YAP2-4. You may set so that it may be determined. In this way, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the number of operations on the operation button 30 in the “button operation advance notice” notice effect as the number of times that the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is executed increases. The contents of the presentation in each display system notice pattern are determined so as not to decrease. As a result, although the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” increases as the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation increases, the presentation effect is reduced due to a decrease in the number of operations of the operation buttons 30. And the distrust of the player can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be improved. Alternatively, even if the number of times of performing pseudo-variation (re-variation) increases, the number of operations on the operation button 30 may decrease due to the notice effect of “button operation notice”. In this case, the operation button In response to the operation of 30, an effect of an effect mode different from normal (for example, displaying a character including a cherry blossom pattern) may be performed.

  In the above embodiment, in the process of step S737 shown in FIG. 56, reference is made to any of display system notice pattern determination tables 171B to 171D, display system notice pattern determination tables 172B to 172D, and display system notice pattern determination tables 173B to 173D. By determining the combination of display system notice patterns, the display system notice pattern corresponding to the notice effect that is executed at the time of the first change and during the variable display of the decorative pattern after the first to the third change is obtained. It was explained as being determined collectively. Also, in the process of step S740 shown in FIG. 56, the combination of the member system advance notice patterns is determined with reference to any of the member system advance pattern determination tables 174B to 174D, so that the first change and the first to 3 times. It has been described that the member system notice pattern corresponding to the notice effect executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern after the second re-variation is determined collectively. Furthermore, if one notice pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is determined, all of the notice effect operations in each change display may be determined. It was. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice pattern corresponding to the notice effect that is executed at the time of the first change and during the variable display of the decorative pattern after the first to third re-changes, for example, each change You may make it determine sequentially, whenever a display is started. In this case, in the processing of step S737 and step S740 shown in FIG. 56, the notice pattern corresponding to the notice effect executed at the time of the first change is determined, and the notice pattern as the determination result is stored. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol variation processing of step S162 shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 57, when each variation display by pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, it is determined in advance corresponding to the previously stored notice pattern. The notice pattern suitable for the combination may be determined as the notice pattern corresponding to the notice effect during variable display after execution of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). The notice pattern determined at this time is also stored, and when pseudo-variation (re-variation) is executed, the notice corresponding to the notice effect in the next change display based on the notice pattern stored in advance. The pattern may be determined.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described. The invention can be applied.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, no determination value is assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. In the case where the variable display result is set to “big hit” based on the establishment and the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state, it has been described that it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and the control is set to the two round big hit state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is set to “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the establishment of the second start condition, the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” at a fixed decision rate. You may be able to do that. In this case, in the jackpot type determination table 131, even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the determination value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. Thereby, the table data in the jackpot type determination table 131 can be simplified, and the data capacity stored in the ROM 101 can be reduced. It should be noted that when the second start condition is satisfied, it may be determined to be the big hit type of “surprise” at a lower determination ratio than when the first start condition is satisfied. As a result, when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short-time state, the round hit type is determined to be “surprise” and almost no ball is obtained. The possibility of becoming a big hit state can be reduced, and a decrease in the game interest can be suppressed due to a delay in a game in a special game state such as a probability change state or a short time state.

  The determination as to whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect may be made by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 or the like. In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type or variation pattern determined on the main board 11 side, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the re-lottery effect and stores it in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. Whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect may be determined by referring to the re-lottery effect determination table.

  The slip pattern may be determined by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 or the like. In this case, a variation pattern designation command for designating the slip pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side together with the variation pattern may be prepared. Alternatively, an effect control command for designating a slip pattern may be prepared separately from the variation pattern designation command.

  The determination as to whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect may be made by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 or the like. In this case, a variation pattern designation command for designating a different variation pattern or a variable display result notification command for notifying a different variable display result according to the presence or absence of the jackpot promotion effect determined on the main board 11 side. Just prepare. Alternatively, an effect control command for specifying the presence or absence of a jackpot promotion effect may be prepared separately from the variation pattern specifying command.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the final stop symbol in steps S503, S504, S506, S511, and S512 shown in FIG. 53, and changes in step S513. It has been described that the contents of control of various effects are determined by executing the effect setting process during display, executing the notice effect setting process in step S514, determining the effect control pattern in step S515, and the like. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control contents of various rendering operations are shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the rendering operations. It may be.

  As an example, a display control board is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. The display control board only needs to be equipped with a display control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a random number circuit, and an I / O. In this case, since the display control CPU mounted on the display control board executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The display control unit 123 may be mounted on the display control board. In the display control board, for example, the display control CPU executes a program read from the ROM, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, the display control CPU writes various variation data to the RAM and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU stores the various data in the RAM. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the display control board via the I / O display control CPU, I / O for the display controlling CPU A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board via the display is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU, for example, based on the display control command from the effect control board 12 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 through the effect control board 12, etc., steps S503, S504, The final stop symbol may be determined by executing the processes of S506, S511, and S512. Further, the display control CPU may determine the slip pattern or the temporary stop symbol by executing the variable display effect setting process in step S513, or execute the notice effect setting process in step S514. Thus, the presence / absence of the notice effect or the notice pattern may be determined. Further, the display control CPU may determine one of the effect control patterns as the use pattern by executing the process of step S515. The display control CPU only needs to execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. Note that the audio control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a control command from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, a display control board as described above is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5, and the effect control pattern determined by the effect control CPU 120 in step S515 in FIG. The display control command may be transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 2, any one of the processes executed by the production control CPU 120 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is selected. May be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 is performed on any control board. The combination to be executed may be any combination.

  In the above embodiment, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state is controlled. After the two round big hit state is finished, the positive change state is controlled. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate”, or in addition to this case, the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “ Some or all of the cases where the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” may be provided. For example, when the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is provided, the variable display result is “small hit” in the first and second special figure display result determination tables 130A and 130B. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the figure display result may be assigned. Alternatively, in the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the determined value is assigned so that the variable display result is “small hit”, while in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the variable display result is “small hit”. By setting so that the determined value is not assigned to the portion to be, the variable display result may not be “small hit” when the second start condition is satisfied. Also, in the jackpot type determination table 131, a numerical value (determination) that is compared with the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type for the jackpot type “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” according to the variation special figure designation buffer value. Value) may be assigned.

  Then, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the variable winning operation for opening the big winning opening is performed as a two-time open game in the same manner as the two round big hit state. After the variable winning operation is completed, the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continued, and the gaming state is not changed. As a result, even if the player recognizes that an open game will be performed twice, the player's expectation on whether or not the game will be in a probable state after the end of the two-time open game is increased, and the gaming interest is improved. be able to.

  Also, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly short”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state in the same way as the big hit type is “surprising”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. As a result, even if the player can recognize that the player will be in the 2-round jackpot state, the player's expectation for the gaming state controlled after the end of the two-round jackpot state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved. it can.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the time-short state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short-time state, it is described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and easily establishing the second start condition. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the advantageous release control that increases the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening is performed. The high base state and the high probability low base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the advantageous release control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened and advantageous opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low-base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened but advantageous opening control is not performed. May be included. As an example, depending on whether the big hit type is "probability change" or "surprise", after the big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state. May be. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise”, the ratio that is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends , They may be different from each other. A special game, such as whether the game state is within or outside a specific period in some or all of a plurality of game states such as a low probability high base state, a high probability high base state, and a high probability low base state. The ratio of reaching the reach state may be varied according to the success or failure of the predetermined condition based on the number of executions.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation button 31 ... Operation detection switch 78 ... Preliminary movable member 86 ... Motor 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A variable display means including a plurality of variable display sections that variably display a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable based on the establishment of the start condition, and a combination of specific identification information in the variable display section A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when it is derived and displayed,
Operation means operable by the player;
Pre-decision means for deciding whether to control to the specific gaming state before the identification information is derived and displayed;
A combination of non-specific identification information is once set in all of the plurality of variable display sections from when the variable display of the identification information is started in response to the start condition being satisfied once until the display is derived and displayed. Re-variable display executing means for executing re-variable display once or a plurality of times for re-execution of variable display of the identification information in all of the plurality of variable display portions after temporarily stopping;
Revariable display determination means for determining whether or not to execute the revariable display during variable display of the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, based on a determination result by the prior determination means;
Based on the determination result by the pre-decision unit, the notice effect for determining the notice effect type for executing the notice effect during the variable display of the identification information is one of a plurality of types classified based on the effect mode. A type determining means;
Among the notice effects included in the notice effect type determined by the notice effect type determining means, the notice effect determining means for determining the notice effect to be executed during the variable display of the identification information;
A notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means during the variable display of the identification information;
As a notice effect type that can be determined by the notice effect type determining means, an operation time notice effect type that includes a plurality of operation time notice effects for notifying the possibility of entering the specific gaming state according to an operation by the player on the operation means. Provided,
In the variable display in which the re-variable display determining unit determines to execute the re-variable display, the notice effect executing unit executes variable display of the identification information in all of the plurality of variable display units. The notice effect is provided in a plurality of notice execution periods including a first notice execution period from the start of the variable display to a temporary stop and a second notice execution period after the start of the re-variable display. Is feasible,
The first notice effect determining means determines that the revariable display determining means performs the revariable display, and the first notice effect type determining means determines the first notice effect type during operation. In the notice execution period and the second notice execution period, the notice effect is determined from the notice effects included in the notice effect type at the time of operation,
The gaming machine further includes:
An operation promotion display means for displaying an operation promotion image for prompting an operation on the operation means by the variable display means when the operation time notice effect is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by that.